JP2015188547A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine constituted to realize more understandable performance with the use of a plurality of movable members.SOLUTION: In variation performance, the possibility of a determination result that a special game will be executed is announced by operating a first movable member (second decorative member 33b), and the determination result that the special game will be executed is announced by operating a second movable member (first decorative member 33a).

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines that perform an effect of notifying a determination result in jackpot determination by a variation effect by a plurality of effect symbols are widely known as effects associated with a game.
Such a gaming machine includes a plurality of movable members (movable effect devices), and provides various effects to the player by the operation of each movable member.

  For example, Patent Document 1 includes a movable member A that performs a tilting operation on the display screen of the effect display device and a movable member B that performs a rotation operation, and the operation mode of the movable member in the notice effect is determined as a result of determination at winning a prize. A gaming machine to be determined based on is described. In this gaming machine, the type of movable member used for the notice effect (movable member A, movable member B, or both movable members A and B), the number of operations of the movable member (one to three times), and Are selected at different ratios depending on the winning determination result.

JP 2011-15916 A

  However, when a plurality of movable members whose operation modes are determined as described above are operated, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to understand what is suggested by looking at the movable members that operate.

  In view of the above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that is configured so as to be able to realize a more easily produced effect using a plurality of movable members.

  In order to achieve the above-described object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present application determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the start condition (main CPU 110a), display means (image display device 31) for displaying a game effect image associated with the game, and at least a first movable member (second decorative member 33b) and a second movable member operable with the game. (First decorative member 33a), display control for notifying the result of the determination by a variation effect by a plurality of effect symbols in the display means, and operation control of the first movable member and the second movable member. Effect control means (sub CPU 120a) for performing, in the change effect, the first control member (second decoration member 33b) from the first standby position to the first movement member in the variable effect. It is notified that the determination result by the determination means may be a determination result that the special game is executed by moving to the position, and the second movable member (first decoration member 33a) is moved from the second standby position. It is notified that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result that the special game is executed by moving to the second operation position.

  In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the gaming machine according to claim 2 of the present invention is the invention according to claim 1 of the present application, wherein the effect control means specifies the plurality of effect symbols in the variation effect. It is informed that it has been determined that the special game is to be executed by stopping display in a display mode, and after the notification, the second movable member (first decorative member 33a) is moved from the second standby position to the first By moving to the second operation position, the fact that the second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game is executed is notified as the special game.

  In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, a gaming machine according to claim 3 of the present invention operates in accordance with the game in the invention according to claim 1 or claim 2 of the present invention by the operation control of the effect control means. A third movable member (third decorative member 33c) that can be operated, and the effect control means executes the second effect (for example, special reach) after executing the first effect (for example, super reach) in the variation effect. ), The third movable member (third decorative member 33c) is moved from the third standby position to the third operating position before the execution of the second effect. .

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to realize a more understandable presentation using a plurality of movable members.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the perspective view of the game machine of the state which open | released the glass frame. It is a figure which shows an example of the perspective view of the back surface side of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot determination table of a jackpot lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting data table at the time of jackpot game completion. It is a figure which shows an example of the special electric accessory operating mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a big prize opening | release aspect determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol in a 1st special symbol display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol in a 2nd special symbol display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the prior determination table of the jackpot lottery in a 1st special symbol display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the prior determination table of the jackpot lottery in a 2nd special symbol display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the table regarding a normal symbol and a starting movable piece. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st start port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol memory | storage determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol stop process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game end process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the small hit game process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the common figure normal electric power control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the normal electric accessory control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the main process in an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process in an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process (1) in an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process (2) in an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the change effect pattern determination process in an effect control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of a change production. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect image displayed on an image display apparatus in a change effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect image displayed on an image display apparatus in a change effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect image displayed on an image display apparatus in a change effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect image displayed on an image display apparatus in a change effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect image displayed on an image display apparatus in a change effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect image displayed on an image display apparatus in a change effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of a change production. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect image displayed on an image display apparatus in a change effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of a change production. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect image displayed on an image display apparatus in a change effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation control information set and memorize | stored for every variation | production effect type. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation control information set and memorize | stored for every variation | production effect type. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation control information set and memorize | stored for every variation | production effect type. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation control information set and memorize | stored for every variation | production effect type. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation control information set and memorize | stored for every variation | production effect type. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation control information set and memorize | stored for every fluctuation | variation production type. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation control information set and memorize | stored for every variation | production effect type. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation control information set and memorize | stored for every variation | production effect type. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation control information set and memorize | stored for every variation | production effect type. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation example of a 2nd decoration member. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation example of a 3rd decoration member. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation example of a 1st decoration member. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation example of a 1st decoration member.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention (hereinafter also referred to as “present embodiments”) will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 in a state where the glass frame in the present embodiment is opened. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment.

  The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 60 that is attached to an island facility of a game store, and a glass frame 50 that is rotatably supported by the outer frame 60 (see FIGS. 1 to 3). In addition, the outer frame 60 is provided with a game board 2 in which a game area 6 in which the game ball 200 flows down is formed.

  The glass frame 50 has a sound output device 32 formed of a speaker, a frame illumination device 34b having a plurality of lamps (LEDs), and an operation means that can be operated by a player for changing the effect mode by a pressing operation. An effect button 35 and a cross key 36 that can be pressed in at least two directions (usually four directions) are provided.

  The audio output device 32 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like, and performs effects by sound. Further, the frame illumination device 34b is configured to provide lighting effects by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp, and is provided at a plurality of positions.

The effect button 35 is provided with an effect button detection switch 35a. When the effect button detection switch 35a detects the player's operation, a further effect is executed according to the operation. Similarly, the cross key 36 is also provided with a cross key detection switch 36b so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1 (see FIG. 4).
In particular, in the present embodiment, the effect button 35 is configured to be movable in the vertical direction by the effect button drive motor 35b (see FIG. 4), and is not protruded (first state) and protruded. The state can be changed to the current state (second state). In some cases, the state of the effect button 35 is changed from a state in which it does not protrude to a state in which the effect button 35 protrudes.

  Further, the glass frame 50 is provided with an operation handle 3 for launching a game ball toward the game area 6 by being rotated, and a tray 40 for storing a plurality of game balls. The game ball has a downward slope so that the game ball flows down toward the direction of the operation handle 3 (see FIG. 2). A receiving opening for receiving a game ball is provided at the end of the downward slope of the tray 40, and the game ball received in the receiving opening is driven by the ball feed solenoid 4b, so that the glass frame 50 One game ball is sent to the ball feed opening 41 provided on the back surface one by one.

  Then, the game ball sent out to the ball feed opening 41 is guided to the end of the downward slope of the launch rail 42 by the launch rail 42 having a downward slope toward the launching member 4c. A stopper 43 for stopping the game ball is provided above the downwardly inclined end portion of the launch rail 42, and the game ball sent out from the ball feed opening 41 is at the downwardly inclined end portion of the launch rail 42. One game ball is stopped (see FIG. 2).

  When the player touches the operation handle 3, the touch sensor 3a (see FIG. 4) provided inside the operation handle 3 detects that the operation handle 3 and the player are in contact with each other. Thereafter, when the player rotates the operation handle 3, the launch volume 3b directly connected to the operation handle 3 also rotates, and the launch intensity of the game ball is adjusted by the launch volume 3b. The launch member 4c directly connected to the solenoid 4a for rotation rotates. By rotating the launch member 4 c, the game ball 200 stored at the end of the downward slope of the launch rail 42 is launched by the launch member 4 c, and the game ball is launched into the game area 6.

  When the game ball fired as described above rises between the rails 5a and 5b from the launch rail 42 and exceeds the ball return prevention piece 5c, the game ball reaches the game area 6 and then freely falls within the game area 6. . At this time, the game ball falls unpredictably by a plurality of nails and windmills provided in the game area 6.

  In the game area 6 of the game board 2, there are various winning ports (general winning port 12, normal symbol gate 13, first starting port 14, second starting port 15, first grand winning port 16, second large winning port. 17), an image display device 31, and a decorative member 7 so as to surround the display area of the image display device 31.

  On the other hand, outside the game area 6 of the game board 2, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the normal symbol display device 22, and the first special symbol hold display 23 A second special symbol hold indicator 24 and a normal symbol hold indicator 25 are provided.

  A plurality of general winning ports 12 are provided in the game area 6, and these general winning ports 12 are provided with a general winning port detection switch 12a. When the general winning opening detection switch 12a detects the entry of a game ball, a predetermined prize ball (for example, 10 game balls) is paid out.

  In addition, a first start port 14 and a second start port 15 that constitute a start region in which a game ball can enter (enter) are provided in a region below the center of the game region 6.

  The second starting port 15 has a starting movable piece 15b, and is in a closed mode in which the starting movable piece 15b stands vertically and an open mode in which the starting movable piece 15b is tilted forward. Movable controlled. At this time, when the second starting port 15 is controlled in the above-described opening mode, the starting movable piece 15b functions as a tray, and it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 15. That is, when the second start port 15 is in the closed mode, there is no opportunity for entering a game ball, and when it is in the open mode, the opportunity for entering a game ball is increased compared to the closed mode.

  Here, the first start port 14 is provided with a first start port detection switch 14a for detecting the entrance of a game ball, and the second start port 15 is provided with a second start port detection switch for detecting the entrance of a game ball. 15a is provided. When the first start port detection switch 14a or the second start port detection switch 15a detects the entry of a game ball, a special symbol for performing a “hit lottery” (also referred to as “hit determination”) described later. Get random number for judgment.

  In addition, when the first start port detection switch 14a or the second start port detection switch 15a detects the entrance of a game ball, in addition to the special symbol determination random number value, a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined. The jackpot symbol random number value, the reach determination random number value, and the special symbol variation random value value for determining the variation time of the special symbol are also acquired.

  Further, even when the first start port detection switch 14a or the second start port detection switch 15a detects the entry of a game ball, the same as when the general winning port detection switch 12a detects the winning of a game ball, Prize balls (for example, three game balls) are paid out.

  Further, in the left and right areas of the game area 6, normal symbol gates 13 constituting normal areas through which game balls can pass are provided.

  The normal symbol gate 13 is provided with a gate detection switch 13a for detecting the passage (entrance) of the game ball. Then, when a game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, the gate detection switch 13a detects the passage of the game ball, and acquires a normal symbol determination random number value for performing “normal symbol lottery” described later.

  In addition, when the gate detection switch 13a detects the passing of the game ball, in addition to the normal symbol determination random number value, the normal symbol stop random number value for determining the normal symbol to be stopped and the normal symbol A random time value for determining the fluctuation time is also acquired.

  Further, in the area on the right side of the game area 6, in addition to the normal symbol gate 13 that constitutes the normal area through which the game ball can pass, the first big winning opening 16 through which the game ball can enter and the game ball enter. A second grand prize winning port 17 capable of balling is also provided.

  For this reason, the game balls are configured not to win the first big prize opening 16 and the second big prize opening 17 unless the operation handle 3 is rotated and the game ball is launched with a strong force.

  The first grand prize opening 16 is normally kept closed by the first big prize opening opening / closing door 16b, and it is impossible to enter a game ball. In contrast, when a special game, which will be described later, is started, the first grand prize opening opening / closing door 16b is opened, and the first big prize opening opening / closing door 16b puts the game ball in the first big winning opening 16; It functions as a receiving tray that guides the game ball and can enter the first grand prize opening 16. The first grand prize opening 16 is provided with a first big prize opening detection switch 16a. When the first big prize opening detection switch 16a detects the entry of a game ball, a predetermined prize ball (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

  A second grand prize opening opening / closing door 17b is provided at the right end of the second big prize opening 17 and moves to one of the second big prize opening 17 by moving one of the second big prize opening opening / closing doors 17b as a fulcrum. An open state that makes it easy to win a prize and a closed state that cannot win a prize are controlled. When the second grand prize opening / closing door 17b is opened, the second big prize opening / closing door 17b functions as a tray for guiding the game ball into the second grand prize opening 17, and the game ball becomes the second grand prize winning. It is possible to enter the mouth 17. The second big prize opening 17 is provided with a second big prize opening detection switch 17a. When the second big prize opening detection switch 17a detects the entry of a game ball, a predetermined prize ball ( For example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

  Furthermore, in the lowermost area of the game area 6, all of the general winning opening 12, the first starting opening 14, the second starting opening 15, the first major winning opening 16 and the second major winning opening 17 are entered. An out port 11 is provided for discharging game balls that have not been played.

  In the center of the game area 6, an image display device 31 constituted by an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or the like is provided.

  The image display device 31 displays an image while the game is not being performed, or displays a game effect image (hereinafter also simply referred to as “effect image”) associated with the game. Among them, three effect symbols 38 for notifying a lottery result (this is also referred to as “judgment result”) of a jackpot lottery (which will also be referred to as “hit determination”) described later are displayed, and a specific effect symbol is displayed. When 38 combinations (for example, 777) are stopped and displayed, the jackpot is notified as a lottery result of the jackpot lottery.

  When the game ball enters the first start port 14 or the second start port 15, the effect symbol 38 is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with a special symbol variation display described later, and a special later described after a predetermined variation time has elapsed. Stop display according to the symbol stop display. That is, the timing of the change display of the effect symbol 38 and the special symbol and the timing of the stop display of the effect symbol 38 and the special symbol correspond to each other (the same time).

  Further, in the present embodiment, this effect symbol 38 is the same whether a game ball enters the first start port 14 or when a game ball enters the second start port 15. Various types of effect symbols 38 are displayed in a variable or stopped manner. However, it is configured so that different types of effect symbols 38 are variably displayed or stopped when a game ball enters the first start port 14 and when a game ball enters the second start port 15. It doesn't matter.

  The decorative member 7 surrounding the display area of the image display device 31 is provided with a wall portion standing upright from the game board 2 on the outer periphery so that the game ball does not pass in front of the display area of the image display device 31. It has been.

  In addition, a panel lighting device 34a having a plurality of lamps (LEDs, etc.) is provided on both the left and right sides of the decorative member 7, and the decorative member 7 has a member that has a shape of a rotatable shuriken on the top. A first decorative member 33 a simulating a “signboard” is provided, and a second decorative member 33 b simulating “sword” is provided on the right side of the decorative member 7. In addition, a third decorative member 33c simulating “oval” is provided at the lower right portion of the panel lighting device 34a.

The first decorative member 33a is driven by a panel drive device 33 constituted by a solenoid, a motor, or the like, and an image is displayed from a “second standby position” (original position) that is an upper position than the image display device 31. Moving up and down, such as moving to the “second operating position” (position after movement), which is the position of the front surface of the display device 31, and then moving upward to return to the “second standby position”. Is possible. Similarly, the second decorative member 33b is driven by the panel drive device 33, and a “first standby position” (original position) that is a position on the right side of the image display device 31 with the lower side of the second decorative member 33b as a fulcrum. It is possible to move to the “first operation position” (position after the movement) that is the position of the front surface of the image display device 31 by tilting to the left from the position. Further, the third decorative member 33c is also driven by the panel drive device 33, and a “third standby position” (original position) which is a position on the lower left side of the image display device 31 with the lower side of the third decorative member 33c as a fulcrum. Can be moved to the “third operation position” (position after movement), which is the position of the front surface of the image display device 31.
Note that any of the first decorative member 33a, the second decorative member 33b, and the third decorative member 33c is not limited to the shape and operation mode described here.

  The first special symbol display device 20 provided outside the game area 6 of the game board 2 displays the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed when the game ball enters the first start port 14 as the first lottery result. It is notified by a special symbol, and is composed of a plurality of lighting members composed of LEDs or the like. The special symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the big hit lottery is not immediately notified, but is variably displayed (flashed) for a predetermined time and then stopped (lit).

  The second special symbol display device 21 is used to notify the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed when the game ball enters the second starting port 15 by the second special symbol. The function and configuration are the same as those of the first special symbol display device 20.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as “special symbol” as appropriate.

  Here, the “big hit lottery” (big hit determination) is to establish a start condition such that a special symbol determination random value is acquired when a game ball enters the first start port 14 or the second start port 15. Based on this, it means a process for determining whether or not the acquired special symbol determination random number value is a random value corresponding to “big hit”.

Further, in the present embodiment, “big hit” means that a right to win a big hit game was acquired in the big hit lottery performed on the condition that a game ball entered the first start port 14 or the second start port 15. That means. In the “hit game”, a round game in which the first big prize opening 16 or the second big prize opening 17 is opened is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, four times or sixteen times). A predetermined time is set for the maximum opening time of the first grand prize port 16 or the second grand prize port 17 in each round game, and during this time, the first grand prize port 16 or the second grand prize port 17 is set. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, nine) enter, one round game is completed. In other words, the “big hit game” is a game in which a game ball can enter the first grand prize winning opening 16 or the second big winning prize opening 17 and the player can acquire a winning ball according to the winning prize.
This jackpot game is provided with a plurality of types of jackpots, which will be described in detail later.

  Also, if a game ball enters the first start port 14 or the second start port 15 during a special symbol change display or a special game, which will be described later, and if the big hit lottery cannot be performed immediately, Originally, the right to win the jackpot is held.

  More specifically, a special symbol determination random number value or the like acquired when a game ball enters the first start opening 14 is stored as the first hold, and the game ball enters the second start opening 15. The special symbol determination random number or the like acquired from time to time is stored as the second hold. For both of these holds, the upper limit hold number is set to 4, and the hold number is displayed on the first special symbol hold indicator 23 and the second special symbol hold indicator 24, respectively.

  When there is one first hold, the leftmost LED of the first special symbol hold indicator 23 lights up, and when there are two first holds, the leftmost end of the first special symbol hold indicator 23 The two LEDs turn on. When there are three first holds, three LEDs blink from the leftmost end of the first special symbol hold indicator 23 and the right LED is lit. When there are four first holds, the first Four LEDs are lit from the leftmost end of the special symbol hold indicator 23. In addition, on the second special symbol hold indicator 24, the number of hold of the second hold is displayed in the same manner as described above.

  The normal symbol display device 22 provided outside the game area 6 of the game board 2 is for notifying the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery performed when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13. It is.

  Here, “ordinary symbol lottery” means that when a game ball passes through the ordinary symbol gate 13, a random symbol value for determining a normal symbol is acquired, and the random symbol value for determining the acquired normal symbol corresponds to “winning”. This refers to the process of determining whether or not a numerical value. Regarding the lottery result of this normal symbol lottery, the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13 and the lottery result is not immediately notified. Instead, the normal symbol display device 22 displays a variation such as blinking, When a predetermined fluctuation time has passed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is stopped and displayed so that the player is notified of the lottery result. When the normal symbol lottery is won, a specific normal symbol (for example, “◯”) of the normal symbol display device 22 is turned on, and then the second start port 15 is controlled to be opened for a predetermined time.

  Similarly to the special symbol, when the normal symbol lottery cannot be performed immediately, the right of the normal symbol lottery is held under certain conditions. The upper limit reserved number of the normal symbol is also set to four, and the reserved number is set in the same manner as the first special symbol hold indicator 23 and the second special symbol hold indicator 24 in the normal symbol hold indicator. 25.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the glass frame 50 supports a glass plate 52 that covers the game area 6 so as to be visible in front of the game board 2 (player side). The glass plate 52 is detachably fixed to the glass frame 50.

  The glass frame 50 is connected to the outer frame 60 via the hinge mechanism 51 on one end side in the left-right direction (for example, the left side facing the gaming machine 1). The other end side (for example, the right side facing the gaming machine 1) can be rotated in a direction to release from the outer frame 60. The glass frame 50 covers the game board 2 together with the glass plate 52, and can be opened like a door with the hinge mechanism 51 as a fulcrum to open the inner part of the outer frame 60 including the game board 2.

  A lock mechanism for fixing the other end side of the glass frame 50 to the outer frame 60 is provided on the other end side in the left-right direction of the glass frame 50. The fixing by the lock mechanism can be released by a dedicated key. The glass frame 50 is also provided with a door opening switch 133 that detects whether or not the glass frame 50 is opened from the outer frame 60.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 110, an effect control board 120, a payout control board 130, a power supply board 140, a game information output terminal board 30, and the like are provided on the back surface of the gaming machine 1. In addition, a power plug 141 for supplying power to the gaming machine 1, a frame control board 180 (not shown), and a power switch are provided on the power board 140.

(Block diagram of the entire gaming machine)
Next, control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described with reference to the entire block diagram of the gaming machine 1 of FIG.

  The main control board 110 controls the basic operation of the game, inputs various detection signals from the first start port detection switch 14a, etc., and drives the first special symbol display device 20, the first big winning port opening / closing solenoid 16c, etc. To control the game.

  The main control board 110 is connected to the effect control board 120, the payout control board 130, and the power supply board 140.

  Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 120 is configured such that data can be communicated in only one direction from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120. The communication with 130 is configured to be able to communicate data in both directions. The main control board 110 receives a power supply voltage from the power supply board 140.

  The main control board 110 includes at least a one-chip microcomputer 110m including a main CPU 110a, a main ROM 110b, and a main RAM 110c, and an input port and an output port (not shown) for main control.

  In the main control input port, a payout control board 130, a general winning port detection switch 12a for detecting that a game ball has entered the general winning port 12, and a game ball having passed through the normal symbol gate 13 are detected. A gate detection switch 13a that performs a first start port detection switch 14a that detects that a game ball has entered the first start port 14, and a second start port that detects that a game ball has entered the second start port 15. Detecting switch 15a, second large winning hole detecting switch 16a for detecting that a game ball has entered the first big winning hole 16, and second large ball detecting detecting that a game ball has entered the second large winning hole 17. A winning opening detection switch 17a is connected. Various signals are input to the main control board 110 through the main control input port.

  The output port for main control includes an effect control board 120, a payout control board 130, a start opening / closing solenoid 15c for opening and closing the start movable piece 15b of the second start opening 15, and a first grand prize opening opening / closing door 16b. The first big prize opening / closing solenoid 16c to be operated, the second big prize opening / closing solenoid 17c to operate the second big prize opening / closing door 17b, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device for displaying special symbols. 21. Normal symbol display device 22 for displaying normal symbols, first special symbol hold indicator 23 and second special symbol hold indicator 24 for displaying the number of reserved balls for special symbols, normal for displaying the number of reserved balls for normal symbols A symbol hold display 25 and a game information output terminal board 30 for outputting an external information signal are connected. Various signals are output from the main control output port.

  The main CPU 110a reads out a program stored in the main ROM 110b based on an input signal from each detection switch or timer, performs arithmetic processing, directly controls each device or display, or determines the result of the arithmetic processing. In response, a command is transmitted to another board.

The main ROM 110b of the main control board 110 stores a game control program, data and tables necessary for determining various games.
Specifically, the jackpot determination table (see FIG. 5) used for the jackpot lottery, the symbol determination table (see FIG. 6) for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol, the end of the jackpot game for determining the gaming state after the jackpot ends Time setting data table (see FIG. 7), special electric accessory operating mode determination table (see FIG. 8) for determining the opening / closing conditions of the special winning opening / closing door, special winning opening open mode determination table (see FIG. 9), special symbol A variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern (see FIG. 10), a jackpot lottery pre-determination table (see FIG. 11), a hit determination table (see FIG. 12) referred to in the normal symbol lottery, etc. ing.
Note that the above-described table is merely an example of characteristic tables among the tables in the present embodiment, and a number of other tables and programs (not shown) are provided for the progress of the game. ing.

The main RAM 110c of the main control board 110 functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the main CPU 110a and has a plurality of storage areas.
For example, in the main RAM 110c, a special symbol special power processing data storage area, a general symbol normal power processing data storage area, a normal symbol reservation number (G) storage area, a normal symbol reservation storage area, a stopped normal symbol data storage area, a first special symbol storage area, Symbol hold count (U1) storage area, second special symbol hold count (U2) storage area, first special symbol random value storage area, second special symbol random value storage area, round game number (R) storage area, number of releases (K) Storage area, number of entries in the big prize opening (C) storage area, start / release counter, gaming state storage area (high probability game flag storage area and short-time game flag storage area), high probability game count (X) counter , Hour / times (J) counter, game state buffer, stop special figure data storage area, stop common figure data storage area, transmission data storage area for production, special symbol time counter, special game timer counter, start Open timer counter, start closing timer counter, a variety of timer counter such as start-up interval timer counter, winning balls counter, and the like are provided.
Note that the above-described storage area is merely an example, and many other storage areas are provided.

  The game information output terminal board 30 is a board for outputting an external information signal generated in the main control board 110 to a hall computer or the like of the game shop. The game information output terminal board 30 is connected to the main control board 110 by wiring, and is provided with a connector for connecting external information to a hall computer or the like of a game store.

  The effect control board 120 mainly controls each effect such as during game and standby, and an effect control unit 120m that comprehensively manages the contents of the effect of the game, and image control that performs image display control in the image display device 31. A control unit 160 that controls driving of solenoids, motors, and the like in the panel driving device 33, and a lamp control unit 170 that controls lighting of LEDs and the like in the panel lighting device 34a.

  The effect control board 120 is connected to the main control board 110, the power supply board 140, and the frame control board 180.

As described above, the communication between the effect control board 120 and the main control board 110 is configured such that data can be communicated in only one direction from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120. That is, the effect control board 120 is configured to be able to receive data from the main control board 110 but not to transmit data to the main control board 110.
Further, the communication between the effect control board 120 and the frame control board 180 is configured to be able to communicate data in both directions, and the effect control board 120 receives a power supply voltage from the power supply board 140.

  The effect control unit 120m includes a sub CPU 120a, a sub ROM 120b, and a sub RAM 120c.

  The sub CPU 120a is stored in the sub ROM 120b based on a command received from the main control board 110 or an input signal from the effect button detection switch 35a, the cross key detection switch 36b, etc. received from the frame control board 180 described later. The program is read and arithmetic processing is performed, and based on the processing, instructions for causing the image control unit 150, the drive control unit 160, the lamp control unit 170, and the frame control board 180 to execute various effects (data is stored). Send).

  For example, when the sub CPU 120a receives the variation pattern designation command indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol from the main control board 110, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the content of the received variation pattern designation command, and displays the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the board Effect data (such as an effect pattern designation command to be described later) for causing the drive device 33, the panel illumination device 34a, the frame illumination device 34b, and the effect button drive motor 35b to execute a predetermined effect is determined. Then, the determined presentation data is transmitted to the image control unit 150, the drive control unit 160, the lamp control unit 170, and the frame control board 180.

  The sub ROM 120b stores an effect control program and data and tables necessary for determining various games.

The sub RAM 120c functions as a data work area when the sub CPU 120a performs arithmetic processing, and has a plurality of types of storage areas according to the type of data.
Note that the above-described storage area is merely an example, and many other storage areas are provided.

  The image control unit 150 is connected to the image display device 31 and performs image display control on the image display device 31 based on various types of effect data transmitted from the effect control unit 120m (sub CPU 120a).

  At this time, between the image control unit 150 and the image display device 31, there is provided a general-purpose board 39 having a bridge function that converts the image data into a predetermined image format and outputs it.

  The general-purpose board 39 has a bridge function for converting to an image format corresponding to the performance of the image display device 31 for displaying image data. For example, a 19-inch liquid crystal display device of SXGA (1280 dots × 1080 dots). Is absorbed as the image display device 31, and the difference in resolution between when the XGA (1024 dots × 768 dots) 17-inch liquid crystal display device is connected as the image display device 31 is absorbed.

  The image control unit 150 includes a liquid crystal control CPU 150a, a liquid crystal control RAM 150b, a liquid crystal control ROM 150c, a CGROM 151, a crystal oscillator 152, a VRAM 153, and a drawing control unit (VDP (Video Display Processor) 159 (hereinafter referred to as “VDP 159”). Yes.

  The liquid crystal control CPU 150a creates a display list composed of drawing control commands based on the effect data (effect pattern designation command or the like) transmitted from the effect control unit 120m, and transmits this display list to the VDP 159. By doing so, an instruction to display the image data stored in the CGROM 151 on the image display device 31 is given.

  In addition, when the liquid crystal control CPU 150a receives a V blank interrupt signal or a drawing end signal from the VDP 159, the liquid crystal control CPU 150a appropriately performs an interrupt process.

  The liquid crystal control RAM 150b is built in the liquid crystal control CPU 150a, functions as a data work area when the liquid crystal control CPU 150a performs arithmetic processing, and temporarily stores data read from the liquid crystal control ROM 150c.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 150c is composed of a mask ROM or the like, and a control processing program of the liquid crystal control CPU 150a, a display list generation program for generating a display list, and an animation of an effect using an image corresponding to the effect data An animation pattern for displaying, animation scene information, and the like are stored.

  This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation, and stores a combination of animation scene information of an image corresponding to the effect data, a display order of each animation scene information, and the like. In the animation scene information, a wait frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, and effect image are displayed. Information such as information specifying a display device is stored.

  The CGROM 151 includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like, and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie) or the like that is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 pixels × 32 pixels). doing. The pixel information is composed of color number information for designating a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. The CGROM 151 is read in units of image data by the VDP 159, and image processing is performed in units of image data of this frame.

  Further, the CGROM 151 stores palette data in which color number information for designating color numbers and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other without being compressed. Note that the CGROM 151 may have a configuration in which only a part of the image data is compressed without being compressed. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  The crystal oscillator 152 outputs a pulse signal to the VDP 159 and divides the pulse signal to generate a system clock for the VDP 159 to control, a synchronization signal for synchronizing with the image display device 31, and the like. .

  The VRAM 153 is composed of an SRAM that can write or read image data at high speed. The VRAM 153 has a display list storage area for temporarily storing the display list output from the liquid crystal control CPU 150a, a frame buffer area corresponding to the image display device 31, and the like.

  The frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched to a “drawing frame buffer” and a “display frame buffer” every time drawing is started.

  The VDP 159 is a so-called image processor, and draws image data stored in the CGROM 151 in a “drawing frame buffer” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 153 based on an instruction (display list) from the liquid crystal control CPU 150 a. Further, the VDP 159 reads image data from the “display frame buffer” in the frame buffer area. Then, based on the read image data, a video signal (LVDS signal, RGB signal, etc.) is generated and output to the image display device 31 for display.

  The drive control unit 160 is connected to the board drive device 33, and drives a solenoid, a motor, and the like in the board drive device 33 based on various production data transmitted from the production control unit 120m (sub CPU 120a). Take control. Then, by driving and controlling the board driving device 33, the first decorative member 33a, the second decorative member 33b, and the third decorative member 33c provided in the game board 2 are driven.

  The lamp control unit 170 is connected to the panel lighting device 34a, and controls lighting of LEDs and the like in the panel lighting device 34a based on various types of production data transmitted from the production control unit 120m (sub CPU 120a). Do. Then, by controlling lighting of the board lighting device 34a, the board lighting device 34a provided in the game board 2 is turned on / off.

  The frame control board 180 is connected to the effect control board 120 and the power supply board 140, and as described above, the communication between the frame control board 180 and the effect control board 120 is configured to be able to communicate data in both directions. The frame control board 180 receives the power supply voltage from the power supply board 140.

  The frame control board 180 performs control to output predetermined audio data to the audio output device 32 based on various types of effect data transmitted from the effect control board 120, and turns on LEDs and the like in the frame illumination device 34b. Control is performed, and drive control of the effect button drive motor 35b is performed. Under the control of the frame control board 180, the sound output device 32 provided on the glass frame 50 outputs sound, the frame lighting device 34b is turned on / off, and the effect button 35 moves in the vertical direction. .

  Furthermore, when the input signals from the effect button detection switch 35a and the cross key detection switch 36b are input, the frame control board 180 transmits the input signals to the effect control board 120. That is, the effect control board 120 inputs the input signals from the effect button detection switch 35a and the cross key detection switch 36b via the frame control board 180.

  The payout control board 130 includes a payout control unit 131 that performs payout control of the game ball, and a launch control unit 132 that performs the launch control of the game ball.

  The payout control board 130 is connected to the main control board 110 and the power supply board 140, and as described above, the communication between the payout control board 130 and the main control board 110 is configured to be able to communicate data in both directions. The payout control board 130 receives a power supply voltage from the power supply board 140.

  The payout control unit 131 includes a one-chip microcomputer that includes a payout CPU 131a, a payout ROM 131b, and a payout RAM 131c.

  The payout CPU 131a reads out the program stored in the payout ROM 131b based on the input signals from the payout ball count detection switch 135, the door opening switch 133, and the timer that detect whether or not the game ball has been paid out, and performs arithmetic processing. At the same time, the corresponding payout data is transmitted to the main control board 110 based on the processing.

  Further, a payout motor 134 of a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from the game ball storage unit is connected to the output side of the payout control board 130. The payout CPU 131a reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 131b based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout motor 134 of the payout device to obtain a predetermined game ball. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 131c functions as a data work area during the calculation process of the payout CPU 131a.

  In the firing control unit 132, the touch sensor 3a and the firing volume 3b are connected to the input side, and the firing solenoid 4a and the ball feeding solenoid 4b are connected to the output side. The firing control unit 132 inputs a touch signal from the touch sensor 3a, and performs control to energize the firing solenoid 4a and the ball feed solenoid 4b based on the voltage supplied from the firing volume 3b.

  The touch sensor 3a is provided in the inside of the operation handle 3, and is comprised from the electrostatic capacitance type proximity switch using the change of the electrostatic capacitance by the player touching the operation handle 3. When the touch sensor 3 a detects that the player has touched the operation handle 3, the touch sensor 3 a outputs a touch signal that permits energization of the firing solenoid 4 a to the firing control unit 132. As a major premise, the launch control unit 132 is configured not to launch the game ball 200 into the game area 6 unless a touch signal is input from the touch sensor 3a.

  The firing volume 3b is provided directly connected to a rotating portion around which the operation handle 3 rotates, and is composed of a variable resistor. The firing volume 3b divides a constant voltage (for example, 5V) applied to the firing volume 3b by a variable resistor, and supplies the divided voltage to the firing control unit 132 (the voltage to be supplied to the firing control unit 132). Variable). The launch control unit 132 energizes the launch solenoid 4a based on the voltage divided by the launch volume 3b, and rotates the launch member 4c directly connected to the launch solenoid 4a, thereby playing the game ball 200 in the game. Fire into area 6.

  The launching solenoid 4a is composed of a rotary solenoid, and a launching member 4c is directly connected to the launching solenoid 4a, and the launching member 4c is rotated by rotating the launching solenoid 4a.

  Here, the rotational speed of the firing solenoid 4a is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) based on the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 132. As a result, the number of games played per minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute) because one shot is fired every time the firing solenoid rotates. That is, one game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.

  The ball feed solenoid 4b is composed of a linear solenoid, and sends out the game balls in the tray 40 one by one toward the launch member 4c directly connected to the launch solenoid 4a.

  The power supply board 140 includes a backup power supply composed of a capacitor, supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine 1, and monitors a power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less, An interruption detection signal is output to the main control board 110. More specifically, when the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 110a enters an operable state, and when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 110a enters an operation stop state. Note that the backup power supply is not limited to a capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery or a combination of a capacitor and a battery.

(Description of gaming state)
Next, the gaming state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, there are a “low probability gaming state” and a “high probability gaming state” as states related to the jackpot lottery, and a “non-short-time gaming state” as a state regarding the starter movable piece 15b included in the second starting port 15. “Time-short game state”. The states related to the jackpot lottery (low probability gaming state, high probability gaming state) and the states relating to the startable movable piece 15b (non-short-time gaming state, short-time gaming state) can be associated with each other or can be made independent. it can. That means
(1) The case of “low probability gaming state” and “short time gaming state”;
(2) “Low probability gaming state” and “non-temporary gaming state”
(3) “High probability gaming state” and “short time gaming state”
(4) It is possible to provide a case of “high probability gaming state” and “non-temporary gaming state”.
Note that the gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is a “low probability gaming state” and is set to a “non-short-time gaming state”. Is referred to as a “normal gaming state”.

  In the present embodiment, the “low probability gaming state” means that in the jackpot lottery performed on the condition that a game ball has entered the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15, the winning probability of the jackpot is, for example, 1 / 399 refers to a gaming state set low. On the other hand, the “high probability gaming state” refers to a gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is improved as compared with the low probability gaming state, and the jackpot winning probability is set to be, for example, 1 / 53.2. . Therefore, in the “high probability gaming state”, it is easier to win a jackpot than in the “low probability gaming state”. Note that the low probability gaming state is changed to the high probability gaming state after the jackpot game described later is finished.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability gaming state is called “probability jackpot”, and the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low probability gaming state is called “ordinary jackpot”.

  In the present embodiment, “non-short-time gaming state” means that in the normal symbol lottery performed on condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 13, the average variation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is “ It means a gaming state that is set longer than the “short-time gaming state” and that the opening time of the second start port 15 when winning in the win is easily set. For example, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, the normal symbol lottery is performed, and the normal symbol display device 22 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. Stop display after 2 seconds. If the lottery result is a win, the second start port 15 is controlled to open for 0.2 seconds after the stop display of the normal symbol.

  On the other hand, the “short-time gaming state” means that in the normal symbol lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 13, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is “non- The game state is set to be shorter than the “short-time gaming state” and is set to be longer than the “non-short-time gaming state”, for example, 3 seconds when the opening time of the second start port 15 when winning is won. Further, in the “non-short game state”, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set as low as 1/16, for example, and in the “short time game state”, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is, for example, 15/16. And set high. Therefore, in the “short-time gaming state”, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, the second start port 15 is more easily controlled to the open mode than in the “non-short-time gaming state”. Thereby, in the “short-time gaming state”, the player can advance the game without consuming the game ball.

  In the embodiment, the “short-time gaming state” is set so that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second start port 15 and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery are more advantageous than the “non-short-time gaming state”. Has been. However, the “short-time gaming state” may be set so that only one of the normal symbol variation time, the opening time of the second start port 15 and the normal symbol lottery win probability is advantageous.

  Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Large winning lottery determination table)
FIG. 5A is a jackpot determination table for jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of game balls into the first start opening 14, and FIG. 5B shows the entry of game balls into the second start opening 15. It is a jackpot determination table of a jackpot lottery triggered by a ball. In the tables of FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B, the big hit probability is the same although the winning probability for the small hit is different.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 (a) and 5 (b), the jackpot determination table associates the probability gaming state, the special symbol determination random number value, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table of the jackpot lottery shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, and determines whether the jackpot is based on the current probability gaming state and the acquired special symbol determination random number value. It is judged whether it is “small hit” or “lost”.

  For example, according to the jackpot determination table of the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. 5A, two special symbol determination random numbers “7” and “8” are determined to be jackpots in the low probability gaming state. . On the other hand, in the high probability gaming state, the 15 special symbol determination random numbers “7” to “21” are determined to be jackpots. Further, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol display device shown in FIG. 5A, the special symbol determination random number value is “50” regardless of whether the gaming state is the low probability gaming state or the high probability gaming state. ”,“ 100 ”, and“ 150 ”are determined to be“ small hit ”when the random numbers for special symbol determination are three. If the random number is other than the above, it is determined as “lost”.

  Therefore, since the random number range of the special symbol determination random number value is 0 to 797, the probability that it is determined to be a big hit in the low probability gaming state is 1/399, and it is determined to be a big hit in the high probability gaming state. Probability increases by 7.5 times to 1 / 53.2. In the first special symbol display device, the probability of being determined to be a small hit is 1/266 regardless of whether the game state is a low probability game state or a high probability game state.

(Design determination table)
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a symbol determination table for determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to a lottery lottery result.
FIG. 6A is a symbol determination table that is referred to in order to determine a special symbol stop symbol in case of a loss, and FIG. 6B is for determining a special symbol stop symbol in the case of a big hit. FIG. 6C is a symbol determination table referred to in order to determine a stop symbol of a special symbol at the time of a small hit.

As shown in FIG. 6A, in the symbol determination table in the loss, the special symbol display device type and the special symbol (stop special symbol data) are associated with each other.
It should be noted that a random symbol value for losing symbols may be provided so that a plurality of special symbols can be determined in association with a loss, and a plurality of special symbols and random numbers for losing symbols may be associated with each other.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6B, the symbol determination table in the jackpot includes a special symbol display device type (a type of a start port where a game ball has won), a first start port 14 or a second start port 15. A jackpot symbol random number value acquired when a game ball enters and a special symbol (stop special symbol data) are associated with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (c), the symbol determination table for the small hit also has a special symbol display device type (a type of a start port where a game ball has won) and a game in the first start port 14 or the second start port 15. The random number value for a small hit symbol acquired when the ball enters the ball is associated with a special symbol (stop special symbol data).

  The main CPU 110a refers to the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 6 and determines the type of special symbol (stop special symbol data) based on the type of the special symbol display device, the random number for the jackpot symbol, and the like.

  Then, at the time of starting the variation of the special symbol, an effect designating command as information on the special symbol is determined based on the determined special symbol type (stop special symbol data). Here, the effect designating command is composed of 2-byte data, and 1-byte MODE data for identifying the control command classification and 1-byte DATA indicating the contents of the control command to be executed. It consists of data. The same applies to a variation pattern designation command described later.

Here, as will be described later, the game state after the jackpot game (see FIG. 7) and the jackpot game type (see FIG. 8) are determined by the type of special symbol (stop special chart data). It can be said that the type of special symbol determines the gaming state after the jackpot game ends and the type of jackpot game.
For this reason, in the special symbol in FIG. 6B, the explanation corresponding to the type of jackpot game is supplementarily described.

(Set data table at end of jackpot game)
FIG. 7 is a jackpot game end setting data table for determining the gaming state after the jackpot game ends.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in the big hit game end setting data table, the special symbol stop special data, the game state buffer, the short-time game state, the short-time number of times (J), the probability game state, and the high-probability game The number of times (X) is associated.

  Here, the “gaming state buffer” is information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. The gaming state includes a combination of a short-time gaming state (or a non-short-time gaming state) and a high probability gaming state (or low probability gaming state).

  Specifically, if the gaming state buffer is “00H”, it indicates the gaming state information of the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state in which both the short-time gaming flag and the high-probability gaming flag are not set. If the gaming state buffer is “01H”, the short-time gaming flag is not set, but the high-probability gaming flag indicates gaming state information of the high-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state that are set. If the gaming state buffer is “02H”, it indicates gaming state information of a low-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state in which the short-time gaming flag is set but the high-probability gaming flag is not set. If the game state buffer is “03H”, it indicates the game state information of the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state in which both the short-time gaming flag and the high-probability gaming flag are set.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot game end setting data table shown in FIG. 7, and based on the special symbol stop special data and the game state buffer, the short-time game state, the short-time number of times (J), and the probability game The state and the number of high probability games (X) are determined.

  The feature of the jackpot game end setting data table shown in FIG. 7 in this embodiment is configured to determine a high-probability gaming state until the jackpot lottery is performed 84 times after all the jackpot games are finished. .

Furthermore, the feature of the jackpot game end setting data table shown in FIG. 7 is based on the information stored in the game state buffer (the game state at the time of the jackpot winning) even if the stop special figure data of the same special symbol. It is possible to set the short-time game flag and to change the short-time number (J).
For example, when the special symbol stop special symbol data is the special stop symbol data 04 (special symbol 4), the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state are stored in the gaming state buffer with respect to the short-time gaming flag and the short-time number of times (J). If the game state information (00H) shown is stored, the short-time game flag is not set after the jackpot is ended, and the short-time number (J) is also set to zero. On the other hand, if game state information (02H, 03H or 04H) other than the above is stored in the game state buffer, the short-time game flag is set after the jackpot game ends, and the short-time number (J) is set to 80 times. Set to.
Thereby, the number of time reductions (J) can be changed according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the player can be interested in the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

(Special electric accessory operation mode determination table)
FIG. 8 is a special electric accessory actuating mode determination table for determining the special winning opening opening mode determining table. As will be described later, since the big win game or the small hit game is executed based on this big winning opening release mode determination table, the big winning port opening mode determination table indicates the type of the big win game or the small win game I can say that. In the present embodiment, “table” is appropriately omitted and described as “TBL”.

  As shown in FIG. 8, special symbol stop special figure data and special winning opening release mode determination table are associated with the special electric accessory operating mode determination table.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the special electric accessory operating mode determination table shown in FIG. 8 and determines the special winning opening opening mode determination table based on the special symbol stop special data.

(Large winning opening open mode decision table)
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a configuration of the big prize opening opening mode determination table determined in FIG. 8, and the first big winning opening opening / closing door 16b or the second big winning opening opening / closing door 17b is determined by the big winning opening opening mode determination table. Opening and closing conditions are determined. FIG. 9A is a big winning opening opening determination table group for jackpots that is referred to in the jackpot game. From the first jackpot TBL, the second jackpot TBL, the third jackpot TBL, and the fourth jackpot TBL. It is configured. FIG. 9B shows a big winning opening opening determination table for small hits determined at the small hit game.

  In the big winning opening release determination table shown in FIG. 9A, the type of the big winning opening to be opened (the first big winning opening 16 or the second big winning opening 17) and the maximum round game in one big hit game. The number of times (R), the specified number indicating the maximum number of winnings in a single winning round in one round, the start interval time from the start of the big hit game to the execution of the first round game, and the big winning opening in each round game Maximum number of times of opening (K), opening time of the big prize opening for one opening of each round game, closing time of the big winning opening for one opening of each round game, The closing interval time of the big prize opening from the end of one round game to the execution of the next round game is associated with the end interval time from the end of the last round game to the end of the jackpot game It has been.

  On the other hand, in the big winning opening opening determination table for small hits shown in FIG. 9B, the type of the big winning opening to be opened (the first big winning opening 16) and the one small hit game. Maximum number of times of opening (K), a specified number indicating the maximum number of winning prizes in a single winning game, a start interval time from the start of the small winning game until the first winning opening is opened, The opening time of the big prize opening at each opening number, the closing time of the big winning opening at each opening number, and the end interval time from the end of the closing time of the last big winning opening to the end of the small hit game are associated. ing.

  The main CPU 110a executes a first jackpot game based on the first jackpot TBL, executes a second jackpot game based on the second jackpot TBL, executes a third jackpot game based on the third jackpot TBL, The fourth jackpot game is executed based on the four jackpot TBL, and the jackpot game is executed based on the jackpot TBL.

  According to the first big hit TBL shown in FIG. 9 (a), the first big winning opening / closing door 16b is operated to move the first big winning opening 16 on the right side of the game area 6 up to 29 seconds per round. It is possible to execute the first big hit game that is released until However, if a specified number (9) of game balls wins the first grand prize opening 16 before the opening time of 29 seconds elapses, one round of the game is completed. When the 16-round game ends, the first jackpot game ends.

  Further, according to the second big hit TBL shown in FIG. 9A, the second big prize opening / closing door 17b is operated, and the second big prize opening 17 is moved a plurality of times per round (K = 3). The second big hit game can be executed (the second big winning opening 17 repeats opening for 3 seconds and closing for 1 second). However, when the specified number (9) of game balls wins the second big winning opening 17 before the maximum number of times of opening (K), one round of the game ends. When the 4-round game ends, the second jackpot game ends.

  In addition, the third big hit TBL shown in FIG. 9A is set in the same manner as the second big hit TBL, but the maximum round game number (R) is set larger than the second big hit TBL. Is different. For this reason, the third jackpot game is a jackpot game that is more advantageous than the second jackpot game.

  According to the fourth big hit TBL shown in FIG. 9A, the first big prize opening opening / closing door 16b is operated, and the first big prize winning opening 16 on the right side of the game area 6 is set for two rounds (twice). The fourth big hit game that allows a maximum of 0.052 seconds to be released can be executed. However, if a specified number (9) of game balls wins the first grand prize opening 16 before the opening time of 0.052 seconds elapses, one round of game is completed. When the two-round game ends, the fourth big hit game ends.

  According to the small hit TBL shown in FIG. 9B, the first big prize opening / closing door 16b is operated, and the first big prize opening 16 on the right side of the game area 6 is moved twice for a maximum of 0.052 seconds. Can be released. However, if the specified number (9) of game balls wins the first big winning opening 16 by two times of opening for a maximum of 0.052 seconds, the small hit game is ended.

  Further, the fourth big hit TBL shown in FIG. 9 (a) and the small hit TBL shown in FIG. 9 (b) are the maximum round game number (R) and the maximum open number (K), the closing interval time and the respective open times. Although there is a difference in data at the closing time of the grand prize opening, the same first big prize opening 16 performs the same opening / closing operation (the first big prize opening 16 is opened for 0.052 seconds and closed for 2.0 seconds) 2), the player cannot determine whether the game is the fourth big hit game or the small hit game from the appearance. Thereby, the pleasure which makes a player guess whether it is a 4th big hit game or a small hit game can be provided.

  In this embodiment, the opening time of the fourth big hit game and the opening time of the small hit game are set to exactly the same opening time (0.052 seconds), and the closing time of the fourth big hit game and the small hit game are closed. The time was set to exactly the same closing time (2 seconds). However, the time difference that the player cannot determine whether the game is the fourth big hit game or the small hit game may be provided without setting the exact same time.

  Also, since the opening time (0.052 seconds) of the fourth big hit game and the small hit game is shorter than the time (about 0.6 seconds) at which one game ball is fired as described above, the first big win Even if the mouth opening / closing door 16b is activated, it is difficult to win the first grand prize winning opening 16.

  As described above, in this embodiment, four types of “big hit game” of the first big hit game to the fourth big hit game and one type of “small hit game” are provided. In the present embodiment, the “big hit game” and the “small hit game” are collectively referred to as “special game”.

  And since it is possible to execute the first jackpot game to the fourth jackpot game and the jackpot game with different opening actions of the big prize opening and the big prize opening, it is possible to entertain the player with various special games. .

(Special symbol variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 10A is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol in the first special symbol display device. Moreover, FIG. 10B is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table which determines the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in a 2nd special symbol display apparatus.

  The special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B includes a special symbol display device (type of start opening), a lottery result of the big hit lottery, a special symbol (stop special symbol data), and a reach determination random number value. , The number of reserved balls (U1 or U2) of the special symbol, the random number value for special symbol variation, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol are associated with each other.

  Therefore, it can be said that the “special symbol variation pattern” defines at least the jackpot determination result and the special symbol variation time. In addition, since it is configured to always reach when the jackpot, the reach determination random value is not referred to when the jackpot. The reach determination random number value has a random number range set to 97 (0 to 96), and the special figure variation random value has a random number range set to 100 (0 to 99).

  In the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B, the variation pattern 1 (normally) is set so that the average variation time of the special symbol becomes shorter as the number of reserved balls (U1 or U2) of the special symbol increases. The fluctuation time T2 of the fluctuation pattern 2 (shortening fluctuation) is set to be shorter than the fluctuation time T1 of fluctuation. For example, the fluctuation time T1 of the fluctuation pattern 1 (normal fluctuation) is set to 12 seconds, and the fluctuation time T2 of the fluctuation pattern 2 (shortening fluctuation) is set to 3 seconds.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B, and displays the special symbol display device (type of the start opening), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the special symbol to be stopped, the number of special symbol holding balls ( U1 or U2), the variation pattern of the special symbol and the variation time of the special symbol are determined based on the reach determination random number value and the special symbol variation random value. Although the maximum number of balls “4” may be stored as the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined after subtracting 1 from the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Therefore, “4” is not referred to as the number of reserved balls.

  Based on the determined special symbol variation pattern, a special symbol variation pattern designation command is generated, and information on the special symbol variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control board 120.

  Here, the special symbol variation pattern designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the command classification and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In the present embodiment, when the MODE data is “E6H”, a special symbol variation pattern designation command of the first special symbol display device 20 corresponding to the winning of a game ball at the first starting port 14 is shown, and the MODE data is When it is “E7H”, a special symbol variation pattern designation command of the second special symbol display device 21 corresponding to the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 15 is indicated.

In addition, in the effect control board 120, as will be described later, the effect contents of the changing effect for variably displaying the plurality of effect symbols 38 in the image display device 31 are determined based on the change pattern (variation pattern designation command) of the special symbol. The
The sub CPU 120a of the effect control unit 120m performs display control for notifying the determination result of whether or not to execute the special game by the change effect by the plurality of effect symbols 38 in the image display device 31, and in the change effect as a movable member. Operation control of the 1st decoration member 33a, the 2nd decoration member 33b, and the 3rd decoration member 33c is performed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B, the “normal fluctuation” and “shortening fluctuation” as the production contents of the fluctuation production are a plurality of production symbols 38 that fluctuate at a high speed and do not reach. The normal fluctuation and the shortening fluctuation are different in that the shortening fluctuation ends in a shorter fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation.

  In addition, “reach” (also referred to as “reach effect”) means that a part of the combination of effect symbols 38 for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped and other effect symbols 38 change. This means a variation that gives a big hit expectation. For example, when the combination of the three-digit effect symbol 38 of “777” is set as the combination of the effect symbols 38 that notify the jackpot, the two effect symbols 38 temporarily stop at “7” and the remaining effects An aspect in which the pattern 38 is changing. The “temporary stop” refers to an aspect in which the effect design 38 is shown to be stopped by the player as the effect design 38 swings small or the effect design 38 deforms small.

The gaming machine 1 performs the normal reach as the first stage reach effect by temporarily stopping some of the effect symbols 38 in the reach manner as the reach effect in the variable effect, and then the first stage. As the second stage of reach production, which is more likely to be executed than the reach production (normal reach), the “reach production A” that executes super reach and the first stage reach production (normal reach) were executed. Later, the second stage reach production (super reach) is executed, and after the second stage reach production (super reach), the special game may be executed rather than the second stage reach production (super reach) As the third stage reach production with high, “reach production B” to execute special reach and the first stage reach production (normal reach) In, and a "reach demonstration C" reach demonstration of the second stage without performing the (super reach), executes reach demonstration of the third stage (Special reach).
Examples of “reach production A” include “super reach (big hit) 1” described later.
Examples of the “reach effect B” include “special reach (big hit) 3-1” described later.
Examples of the “reach effect C” include “special reach (big hit) 3-2” described later.

Then, the gaming machine 1 determines the operation or non-operation of the second decorative member 33b that is a movable member in each of such “reach effect A”, “reach effect B”, and “reach effect C”.
Specifically, the effect control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 does not operate the movable member before executing the second stage reach effect (super reach) when executing the “reach effect A”.
In addition, when executing the “reach effect B”, the effect control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 operates the second decorative member 33b as a movable member before executing the second stage reach effect (super reach). A case of not operating.
When the “reach effect C” is executed, the second decoration member 33b is operated as a movable member and is not operated before the third stage reach effect (special reach) is executed.

Here, “normal reach” means the possibility of a big hit (hereinafter, “expectation degree”) in which two of the three production symbols 38 are temporarily stopped in a reach manner and the remaining one of the production symbols 38 is changed. "Also means low reach production. In the present embodiment, when only “normal reach” is executed as a reach production, the jackpot is not won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is configured to win a jackpot when only “normal reach” is executed. May be.
“Super reach” means a reach that has a higher expectation of jackpot than “normal reach”. In the present embodiment, after executing “normal reach” (first stage reach effect), this “super reach” is executed as the second stage reach effect. This “super reach” refers to a mode in which, for example, the production symbol 38 that is not temporarily stopped undergoes special fluctuations or a special character is displayed.
Further, “special reach” means a reach (third stage reach production) having a higher expectation of jackpot than “super reach” (second stage reach production). In this embodiment, “normal reach” (first stage reach production) and “super reach” (second stage reach production) are executed in this order, or “normal reach” (first stage reach production) is executed. ) Is executed after executing.
In addition, the “full rotation reach” means a mode in which the combination of a plurality of effect symbols 38 for notifying the jackpot is all in a low speed state, and in the present embodiment, only when winning in the jackpot lottery. Means reach to be performed.

Further, the sub CPU 120a performs control for notifying the possibility that the determination result of the jackpot determination will be the determination result that the jackpot game is executed by operating the second decorative member 33b as a movable member in the variation effect.
Further, the sub CPU 120a performs control for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the determination result that the jackpot determination is executed by operating the first decorative member 33a as a movable member in the variation effect.

Further, the sub CPU 120a informs that it has been decided to execute the jackpot game by stopping and displaying the plurality of effect symbols 38 in the display mode having the same numerical effect symbols (for example, 444) in the variation effect. After the notification, by operating the first decorative member 33a, a jackpot game (second special game) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined jackpot game (first special game) is executed as the special game. Inform the effect.
The “first special game” is, for example, “4R (round) jackpot”, and the “second special game” is, for example, “16R (round) jackpot”.
The “first special game” and the “second special game” are not limited to this, and the “second special game” is more advantageous to the player than the “first special game”. Good.

  In addition, when the sub CPU 120a executes the second effect (for example, (special reach)) after executing the first effect (for example, “super reach”) in the variable effect, before executing the second effect. The third decorative member 33c is operated.

The sub CPU 120a does not project the effect button 35 as the operation means when executing the jackpot notice effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the determination result that the jackpot is executed in the variation effect. When the effect (result notification effect) for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the determination result that the jackpot determination is executed (result notification effect) is controlled to (first state) (state that does not project the effect button 35) The first state) or the protruding state (second state) is controlled.
This “big-hit notice effect” is an effect that notifies the possibility that the determination result of the jackpot determination will be a determination result that the jackpot will be executed and gives a sense of expectation that the determination result of the jackpot is a big hit.

  Further, the sub CPU 120a informs that it has been decided to execute the jackpot game by stopping and displaying the plurality of effect symbols 38 in the display mode having the same numerical effect symbols (for example, 444) in the variation effect. When notifying that a jackpot game (second special game) advantageous to the player over a predetermined jackpot game (first special game) is executed as a special game after the notification, at a predetermined rate Then, the effect button 35 is controlled to protrude (second state).

Here, the contents of each reach effect shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B will be briefly described. A specific example of the variation effect in which the reach effect is executed will be described later.
“Super reach (losing)” executes “normal reach” after a normal fluctuation of, for example, 0 or 1 pseudo-continuous times, and then “M child reach” in which a character “M child” described later appears as “super reach”. ”Is executed, and“ Lose ”is notified as a jackpot lottery result.

  “Special Reach (Lose) 1” executes “Normal Reach” after a normal fluctuation of, for example, 2 or 3 pseudo-continuous times, and then “M Child Reach” in which “M Child” appears as “Super Reach” After the execution, a “swordsman A reach” in which a character “swordsman A”, which will be described later, appears as a “special reach” is performed, and “losing” is notified as a jackpot lottery result.

  “First special reach (losing) 1” is performed after “normal reach” is executed after the normal fluctuation of the quasi-continuous number of times, for example, 2 or 3, and then “M child reach” is executed as “super reach”. This is a reach effect in which “C child reach” in which a character “C child” to be described later appears as a reach, and “losing” is notified as a lottery result.

  “Special reach (losing) 2” is performed after “normal reach” is performed after a normal fluctuation of, for example, two or three pseudo-reams, and then “swordsman B” in which a character “swordsman B” described later appears as “special reach”. This is a reach effect in which “reach” is executed and “losing” is notified as a jackpot lottery result.

  “First special reach (losing) 2” executes “normal reach” after a normal fluctuation of, for example, 2 or 3 pseudo-continuous times, and then executes “C child reach”. Is a reach production.

  “Second special reach (losing)” executes “normal reach” after the normal fluctuation of the pseudo continuous number of times, for example, 2 or 3, and then “、 D reach” in which the character “す る D” described later appears. This is a reach effect for notifying “losing” as a jackpot lottery result after execution.

  “Super reach (big hit) 1” is “M child reach” in which the character “M child” appears as “super reach” after “normal reach” is executed after the normal fluctuation of the pseudo continuous number of times, for example, 0 or 1. Is a reach effect for informing the player of “big hit” as the jackpot lottery result.

  “Super Reach (Big Bonus) 2” executes “Normal Reach” after the normal fluctuation of the pseudo continuous number of times 0 or 1 for example, and then executes “M Child Reach” as “Super Reach”. In this case, after the “big hit” is notified, it is a reach effect that performs a re-lottery effect such as whether or not to promote a round.

  “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 1” executes “Normal Reach”, then “M Reach” as “Super Reach”, then “Swordsman A Reach” as “Special Reach” As a result, it is a reach effect that performs a re-lottery effect such as whether to promote a round after notifying “big hit”.

  “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 2” executes “Normal Reach”, then “M Child Reach” as “Super Reach”, then “Swordsman A Reach” as “Special Reach” As a result, after performing the specified revival effect following the effect of notifying of “losing”, and re-drawing the content, such as whether to promote the round after notifying of “hit” as the result of the jackpot lottery It is a reach production that produces a production.

  “Special reach (big hit) 3” is a general term for “special reach (big hit) 3-1” and “special reach (big hit) 3-2”. In “special reach (big hit) 3-1” and “special reach (big hit) 3-2”, the sub CPU 120 a of the effect control unit 120 m changes the “variation pattern 23” or “variation pattern 24” from the main control board 110. When the pattern designation command is received, either “special reach (big hit) 3-1” or “special reach (big hit) 3-2” is determined.

  In a gaming state other than the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the gaming machine 1 performs the “special reach” without executing the “super reach” after the “normal reach” is executed. Also, the “reach effect” (reach effect B) is executed at a higher rate after “super reach” is executed after “normal reach” is executed, and then “special reach” is executed.

On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state after the jackpot game is finished, the player recognizes that it is easy to win a jackpot, so the “super reach” is executed after the “normal reach” is executed. When “Special Reach” is executed, the user feels bothered by the production.
Therefore, the gaming machine 1 may not execute the “reach effect B” in the high-probability game state and the short-time game state, or may execute the “reach effect C” at a higher rate than the “reach effect B”. To.
In this case, the main CPU 110a determines each variation pattern with the ratio of the random numbers for special figure variation in FIGS. 10A and 10B in the gaming state other than the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state. In the gaming state, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of “reach effect B” is set to 0% (no special variation random value). Note that the determination ratio of the variation pattern of “reach effect C” may be set higher than the determination ratio of the variation pattern of “reach effect B”.

For example, in the gaming state other than the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the main CPU 110a displays “special reach (losing) as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B when the lottery result is a loss (special symbol 0). ) The variation patterns 7 and 8 of “1” are determined at a rate of 15%, and the variation patterns 11 and 12 of “special reach (losing) 2” are determined at a rate of 10%.
On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the main CPU 110a does not determine the fluctuation patterns 7 and 8 of the “special reach (losing) 1” when the lottery result of the jackpot is losing (special symbol 0) ( 0%) and “special reach (losing) 2” variation patterns 11 and 12 are determined at a rate of 25%, and other variation patterns are determined at the same rate as the rates shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B.
In the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the main CPU 110a sets the variation patterns 7 and 8 of “special reach (lack) 1” to a percentage of 5% when the lottery result of the jackpot is losing (special symbol 0). The variation patterns 11 and 12 of “special reach (losing) 2” are determined at a rate of 20%, and the other variation patterns are determined at the same rate as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B. Good.

Further, in the gaming state other than the high probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the main CPU 110a displays “special” as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B when the big winning lottery result is the second big winning (special symbols 2 and 6). Fluctuation patterns 21-24 of “reach (big hit) 1” and “special reach (big hit) 2” are determined at a rate of 16%, and fluctuation patterns of “special reach (big hit) 4” and “special reach (big hit) 5” 27 to 30 are determined at a rate of 20%.
On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the main CPU 110a performs “special reach (bonus) 1” and “special reach (bonus) 2” when the jackpot lottery result is the second jackpot (special symbols 2 and 6). ”Fluctuation patterns 21 to 24 are not determined (0%),“ special reach (big hit) 4 ”and“ special reach (big hit) 5 ”fluctuation patterns 27 to 30 are determined at a rate of 36%. The variation pattern is determined at the same rate as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B.
In the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the main CPU 110a performs “special reach (bonus) 1” and “special reach (bonus) 2” when the jackpot lottery result is the second jackpot (special symbols 2 and 6). ”Is determined at a rate of 8%,“ Special Reach (Big Bonus) 4 ”and“ Special Reach (Big Bonus) 5 ”are determined at a rate of 28%. The variation pattern may be determined at the same rate as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B.

Similarly, the main CPU 110a, in a gaming state other than the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, when the jackpot lottery result is the first jackpot (special symbols 1, 5), the third jackpot (special symbols 3, 7) 10A and 10B, fluctuation patterns 21 to 24 of “special reach (big hit) 1” and “special reach (big hit) 2” are determined at a rate of 16%, and “special reach (big hit)” is determined. 4 ”and“ special reach (big hit) 5 ”variation patterns 27 to 30 are determined at a rate of 20%.
On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the main CPU 110a determines that “special reach (bonus)” when the jackpot lottery result is the first jackpot (special symbols 1 and 5) and the third jackpot (special symbols 3 and 7). ) The change patterns 21 to 24 of “1” and “special reach (big hit) 2” are not determined (0%), and the change patterns 27 to 30 of “special reach (big hit) 4” and “special reach (big hit) 5” are determined. Is determined at a ratio of 36%, and other fluctuation patterns are determined at the same ratio as the ratios shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B.
In the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the main CPU 110a determines that “special reach (bonus)” when the jackpot lottery result is the first jackpot (special symbols 1, 5) and the third jackpot (special symbols 3, 7). ) The change patterns 21 to 24 of “1” and “special reach (big hit) 2” are determined at a rate of 4%, and the change patterns 27 to 30 of “special reach (big hit) 4” and “special reach (big hit) 5” are determined. May be determined at a rate of 32%, and the other variation patterns may be determined at the same rate as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B.

When the sub CPU 120a receives a variation pattern designation command (“E6H17H”, “E6H18H”, “E7H17H”, “E7H18H”) corresponding to “variation pattern 25” or “variation pattern 26” from the main control board 110, The “special reach (big hit) 3-1” and the “special reach (big hit) 3-1” are executed at specific ratios according to the random numbers 0 to 99 for distribution.
The sub CPU 120a sets “special reach (big hit) 3-1” to 70% (0 to 69) according to the random number for distribution (0 to 99) in the gaming state other than the high probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state. And execute “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-2” at 30% (70 to 99).
On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the sub CPU 120a does not execute “special reach (big hit) 3-1” according to the random number for distribution (0 to 99), but does not execute “special reach (big hit) 3”. -2 "only. In the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the sub CPU 120a executes “special reach (big hit) 3-1” at a rate of 5% (0-4) according to the random number for distribution (0-99). However, “special reach (big hit) 3-2” may be determined to be executed at a rate of 95% (5 to 99).

  As a result, it is possible to eliminate the troublesome effects in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, and it is possible to shorten the variation time.

“Special reach (big hit) 3-1” executes “normal reach” after the normal fluctuation of the pseudo continuous number of times, for example, 2 times or 3 times, and then executes “M child reach” as “super reach”. This is a reach production in which “swordsman A reach” is executed as “special reach”, and “bonanza” is notified as a jackpot lottery result.
“Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-2” is executed after “Normal Reach” is executed after a normal fluctuation of 2 or 3 pseudo-reams, and then “Swordsman B Reach” is executed as “Special Reach”. This is a reach effect in which “Large Bonus” is notified as the result of the lottery, and a re-lottery effect of the content such as whether to promote the round or not.
In this way, “special reach” (swordsman A reach), which is the third stage reach production in “special reach (big hit) 3-1” as “reach production B” described above, The production mode is different from “special reach” (swordsman B reach), which is the third stage reach production in “special reach (big hit) 3-2” as “reach production C”.
Then, as will be described later, the gaming machine 1 executes “special reach” in “reach effect C” using a unique motif mode, and also uses this motif mode in “special reach” in “reach effect B”. Control to be executed using.

  “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 4” is executed after “Normal Reach” is executed after the normal fluctuation of the pseudo continuous number of times, for example 2 times or 3 times, and after that, “Swordsman B Reach” is executed, and then “Big Jack” is obtained as a big hit lottery result. It is a reach production that informs.

  For “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 5”, “Normal Reach” is executed after the normal fluctuation of the quasi-continuous number of times, for example, 2 or 3, and then “Swordsman B Reach” is executed. Reach effect that performs a predetermined rebirth effect following the effect that informs the player, notifies the winner of the jackpot lottery result, and then performs a re-lottery effect such as whether to promote the round. It is.

  “First special reach (big hit) 1” is a special after executing “normal reach” after a normal fluctuation of 2 or 3 pseudo-continuous times and then executing “M child reach” as “super reach”. This is a reach effect in which “C child reach” is executed as a reach and “big hit” is notified as a jackpot lottery result.

  “First special reach (big hit) 2” is executed after “normal reach” is performed after the normal fluctuation of, for example, 2 or 3 pseudo-continuous times, and then “C child reach” is executed thereafter. It is a reach production that informs "big hit".

  The “second special reach (big hit)” executes “normal reach” after the normal fluctuation of the quasi-continuous number of times, for example, 2 times or 3 times, and then “侍 D reach” in which the character “侍 D” described later appears. This is a reach effect that is executed and notifies “big hit” as a big win lottery result.

“Super reach (fourth big hit or small hit)” is executed after “normal reach” is executed after the normal fluctuation of the quasi-continuous number of times, for example, two times or three times, and then “M child reach” is executed as “super reach”. , “Lose” is notified as a jackpot lottery result, and after the special effects described below are executed, the special symbols described later are stopped and displayed as the final stop symbols (predetermined wins) are notified to the player. Reach production.
The gaming machine 1 is configured such that when the player wins the fourth big hit or the small hit, it is impossible to determine which hit is based on the appearance in the “super reach (fourth big hit or the small hit)”. . As described above, in the fourth big hit game or the small hit game, it is impossible to determine whether it is the fourth big hit game or the small hit game from the appearance.
Thereby, the pleasure which makes a player guess whether it is a 4th big hit or a small win can be provided.

  “Pseudo-continuous notice” means “the number of times of pseudo-continuous notice”, and “pseudo-continuous notice” means that the special symbol corresponding to one big win lottery is displayed during the variable display. This means that the design 38 is temporarily stopped and then changed again, so that the change in the effect design 38 and the temporary stop are performed a plurality of times in advance.

(Special symbol pre-judgment table)
FIG. 11A and FIG. 11B are diagrams showing a prior determination table for determining in advance the results of the jackpot lottery referred to in the low probability gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 11A and FIG. 11B, the pre-determination table includes a special symbol display device (type of start port), a special symbol determination random number value, a jackpot symbol random number value, a reach determination random number value, and a special symbol. The random number for variation is associated with the start winning information.

Here, it is possible to determine in advance whether it is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” by using the random number for special symbol determination acquired when the game ball enters the starting port. And the presence / absence of transition to the high probability gaming state can be determined in advance.
Furthermore, because the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation random number value can determine the contents of the presentation (whether the reach has occurred, the type of reach), etc. in advance, the start prize information (DATA for the start prize designation command) Can determine information on the type of jackpot and the contents of the production (scheduled variation pattern).

  The main CPU 110a refers to the pre-determination table shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, and displays a special symbol display device (type of start port), a special symbol determination random number value, a jackpot symbol random number value, a reach determination random number value, and a special symbol. Based on the random number for fluctuation, “start winning information” is determined. Then, based on the determined start winning information, a start winning designation command for determining the result of the jackpot lottery in advance is generated.

  This start winning designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the command classification and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In the present embodiment, when the MODE data is “E8H”, a start winning designation command corresponding to the winning of the game ball is shown at the first start opening 14, and when the MODE data is “E9H”, the second start opening is indicated. 15 shows a start winning designation command corresponding to the winning of a game ball.

11A and 11B is similar to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B. However, the pre-judgment table shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B is used when the game ball enters the start opening, whereas the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B is used when the special symbol variation starts. Each judgment time is different. In addition, it is also different whether or not “the number of reserved balls” is referred to.
For this reason, in the prior determination tables shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, the type of jackpot or reach can be determined, but only “normal variation” and “shortened variation” cannot be determined (FIG. 11A). And “start winning information 1” shown in FIG. 11B).

11A and 11B are jackpot lottery pre-judgment tables that are referred to in the low-probability gaming state. Although not shown, the jackpot lottery referencing in the high-probability gaming state is omitted. The determination table is also stored in the main ROM 110b.
Note that the jackpot lottery pre-determination table referenced in the high-probability gaming state is configured in the same manner as the pre-judgment tables shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B. The value of the random number for special symbol determination for determining in advance is different.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a table related to the normal design and the start movable piece 15b of the second start port 15.

  FIG. 12A is a diagram showing a hit determination table used for the normal symbol lottery, and FIG. 12B is a stop symbol determination table for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery. FIG. FIG. 12 (c) is a variation time determination table for determining the variation time of the normal symbol. FIG. 12 (d) is for determining the opening mode of the starting movable piece 15b when the normal symbol lottery is won. It is a figure which shows the starting port open | release mode determination table.

(Normal symbol lottery determination table)
As shown in FIG. 12A, in the hit determination table, presence / absence of a short-time gaming state, a random number for normal symbol determination, and a lottery result of a normal symbol lottery are associated.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the winning determination table shown in FIG. 12A, and determines whether it is “winning” or “lost” based on the current short-time gaming state and the acquired random number for normal symbol determination.

  For example, according to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 12A, when in the non-short game state, it is determined that one specific normal symbol determining random value of “0” is a win. On the other hand, in the short-time gaming state, it is determined that 15 specific random symbols for determining normal symbols from “0” to “14” are hit. If the random number is other than the above, it is determined as “lost”. Therefore, since the random number range of the normal symbol determination random value is 0 to 15, the probability of being determined to be hit in the non-short game state is 1/16, and the probability of being determined to be win in the time-short gaming state is 15/16.

(Normal symbol stop symbol determination table)
As shown in FIG. 12 (b), the stop symbol determination table corresponds to the presence / absence of the short-time gaming state, the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery, the random number value for stopping the normal symbol, and the normal symbol (stop normal symbol data). It is attached.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the stop symbol determination table shown in FIG. 12B, and displays a stop display based on the current short time gaming state, the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery, and the acquired random number for stopping the normal symbol. Determine the normal symbol (stop normal map data).

  Then, the main CPU 110a determines a general symbol designation command as information on the normal symbol on the basis of the determined normal symbol type (stop normal symbol data) at the start of normal symbol variation, and determines the determined common symbol designation command. Is transmitted to the effect control board 120.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 12 (d), since the opening mode of the starting movable piece 15b is determined by the normal symbol (stop normal pattern data), the type of the normal symbol indicates the opening mode of the starting movable piece 15b. It can be said that it is determined.

(Normal symbol variation time determination table)
As shown in FIG. 12 (c), the fluctuation time determination table correlates presence / absence of a short-time gaming state, a lottery result of a normal symbol lottery, a random time value for a normal symbol time, and a fluctuation time of a normal symbol. Yes.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the variation time determination table shown in FIG. 12 (c), and based on the current time-short game state, the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery, and the acquired random number for normal time, the normal symbol Determine the variation time.

  Then, the main CPU 110a determines a normal pattern variation designation command as information on the variation time of the normal symbol based on the determined variation time of the normal symbol at the start of the variation of the normal symbol, Is transmitted to the effect control board 120.

  As a feature of the variation time determination table shown in FIG. 12 (c), the variation time (3 seconds or 5 seconds) of the short-time gaming state is made shorter than the variation time (30 seconds or 40 seconds) of the non-short-time gaming state. It is configured.

(Starting opening open mode determination table for starting movable piece)
As shown in FIG. 12 (d), the start opening release mode determination table includes stop normal data (ordinary symbol), the maximum number of times the start movable piece 15b is released (S), the opening time of the start movable piece 15b, The closing time of the starting movable piece 15b is associated.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the start port opening manner determination table shown in FIG. 12D, and determines the maximum opening number (S), opening time, closing time, and interval time of the starting movable piece 15b based on the stop normal data. decide.

  In the present embodiment, in the start port opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 12D, the start port opening mode based on stop common map data = 02 is more advantageous than the start port opening mode based on stop normal map data = 01. The opening mode is an opening mode, and the starting port opening mode based on the stop map data = 03 is an advantageous opening mode than the starting port opening mode based on the stop map data = 02.

Then, as shown in the random number value for stoppage in the stop symbol determination table in FIG. 12 (b), stop stoppage data = 03 which is the most advantageous release mode when selected in the short-time gaming state is selected. Will be.
As a result, in the short-time gaming state, the starting movable piece 15b operates more advantageously for the player than in the non-short-time gaming state.

  Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described using a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board 110)
The main process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When power is supplied from the power supply board 140, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.

  First, in step S10, the main CPU 110a performs activation processing such as access permission setting to the main RAM 110c, serial communication port initialization, hard random number activation, watchdog timer initialization, and emission signal setting.

  In step S11, the main CPU 110a generates a checksum of the main RAM 110c when the power is turned on.

  In step S12, the main CPU 110a compares the checksum of the main RAM 110c generated when the power is turned on with the checksum of the main RAM 110c generated when the power is turned off. If they match, it is determined to be normal, and the process proceeds to step S14. If they do not match, it is determined to be an error, and the process proceeds to step S13.

  In step S13, the main CPU 110a clears the use area of the main RAM 110c in order to clear the state when the power is shut off.

  In step S14, the main CPU 110a performs initial setting of devices around the CPU. Specifically, the output setting to the effect control board 120, the setting of the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 ms) of the CTC to be used, etc. are set.

  In step S15, the main CPU 110a generates a power-on command based on the gaming state and the like, and transmits the generated power-on command to the effect control board 120 and the payout control board 130.

  In step S20, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation random value for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol.

  In step S30, the main CPU 110a updates the initial random number value for special symbol determination, the initial random number value for jackpot symbol, the initial random number value for small bonus symbol, the initial random number value for normal symbol determination, and the initial random value for normal symbol stop. Do.

  In step S40, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the power cutoff flag is ON. If it is determined that the power shutdown flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S41 to prepare for power interruption, and if it is determined that the power shutdown flag is not ON, the process returns to step S20.

  Here, when the power supply board 140 detects a power failure (voltage drop), the power supply board 140 outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 110. Then, the main CPU 110a that has input the power interruption detection signal sets the power interruption flag to ON. Thus, the “power cutoff flag” is turned ON when the power supply board 140 detects a power failure (voltage drop).

  Then, unless the power is cut off, in normal games, the processes of Step S20 and Step S30 are repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

In step S41, the main CPU 110a performs backup storage processing for storing various data in the nonvolatile main RAM 110c in preparation for shutting down the power.
Thereby, when the power source of the gaming machine 1 is shut off, various data can be retained even when the power source is shut off.

  In step S42, the main CPU 110a creates a checksum of the main RAM 110c when the power is shut off.

  In step S43, the main CPU 110a prohibits access to the main RAM 110c and protects the contents of the main RAM 110c. Then, an infinite loop is performed to prepare for power down.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board 110)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG.

  A clock pulse is generated every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110, thereby executing a timer interrupt process described below.

  First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register of the main CPU 110a to the stack area.

  In step S110, the main CPU 110a updates the special symbol time counter update process, the special game timer counter update process such as the opening time of the special electric accessory, the normal symbol time counter update process, the opening / closing time of the starting movable piece 15b. Time control processing for updating various timer counters such as update processing is performed. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter, the normal symbol time counter, the start / open timer counter, and the start / close timer counter is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines the random number for the special symbol determination, the random number for the big hit symbol, the random number for the small bonus symbol, the random number for the normal symbol determination, the random number for the normal symbol stop, the random number for the normal symbol time, Perform update processing.
Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are updated by adding +1. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value in the random number range (when the random number counter makes one revolution), the random number counter is returned to 0, and each random number value is newly updated from the initial random number value at that time. .

  In step S130, as in step S30, the main CPU 110a, the initial random number value for special symbol determination, the initial random number value for big hit symbol, the initial random number value for small bonus symbol, the initial random number value for normal symbol determination, the initial random number value for normal symbol determination, An initial random value update process for updating the initial random value is performed.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a performs input control processing.
In this process, the main CPU 110a includes a general winning opening detection switch 12a, a first large winning opening detection switch 16a, a second large winning opening detection switch 17a, a first starting opening detection switch 14a, a second starting opening detection switch 15a, a gate. It is determined whether or not there is an input to the various switches of the detection switch 13a. If there is an input, input control processing for setting predetermined data is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol special electric control process for performing a jackpot lottery, a special symbol display control, an opening / closing control of the first grand prize winning port 16 or the second big prize winning port 17, and a game state control. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs normal symbol power control processing for performing normal symbol lottery, normal symbol display control, and opening / closing control of the startable movable piece 15b when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13. I do. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S500, the main CPU 110a performs a payout control process.
In this payout control process, the main CPU 110a refers to the prize ball counter in the main RAM 110c, generates a payout number designation command corresponding to the payout number, and transmits the generated payout number designation command to the payout control board 130.

  In step S600, the main CPU 110a, external information data, start opening / closing solenoid data, first big prize opening opening / closing solenoid data, second big prize opening opening / closing solenoid data, special symbol display device data, normal symbol display device data, number of stored Performs data creation for the specified command.

  In step S700, the main CPU 110a performs output control processing. In this process, a port output process is performed for outputting signals of the external information data, the start opening / closing solenoid data, the first big prize opening / closing solenoid data, and the second big prize opening / closing solenoid data created in S600.

  In step S700, the main CPU 110a uses the special symbol display device data created in S600 to turn on the LEDs of the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, and the normal symbol display device 22. And normal symbol display device data are output. In step S700, the main CPU 110a also performs a command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 120.

  In step S800, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a.

(Input control processing of main control board 110)
The input control processing of the main control board 110 will be described using FIG.

  In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process.

In this general winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 12a. If there is no input of a detection signal from the general winning opening detection switch 12a, the process proceeds to the next step.
When a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 12a, the payout number corresponding to the general winning opening is added to the winning ball counter and updated, and then the process proceeds to the next step.

  In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening detection switch input process.

In this special winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the first large winning opening detection switch 16a or the second large winning opening detection switch 17a. If no detection signal is input from the first big prize opening detection switch 16a or the second big prize opening detection switch 17a, the process proceeds to the next step.
When the detection signal from the first big prize opening detection switch 16a or the second big prize opening detection switch 17a is inputted, the payout number corresponding to the big prize opening is added to the prize ball counter and updated. After updating by adding 1 to the large winning opening number of balls (C) storage area for counting the game balls won in the large winning opening 16 or the second large winning opening 17, the process proceeds to the next step.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first start port detection switch input process.
In this first start port detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the first start port detection switch 14a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first start port 14, and a predetermined value is determined. Set the data. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start port detection switch input process. In the second start port detection switch input process, the same process as the first start port detection switch input process shown in FIG.
However, as compared with the first start port detection switch input process and the second start port detection switch input process, the data storage areas are different. That is, the first special symbol hold number (U1) storage area in the first start port detection switch input process is replaced with the first special symbol hold number (U2) storage area in the second start port detection switch input process. The first special symbol random value storage area in the mouth detection switch input process is configured in place of the second special symbol random value storage area in the second start port detection switch input process.

  In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing.

  In this gate detection switch input process, it is first determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 13a. If no detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 13a, the gate detection switch input process is terminated, and the current input control process is terminated.

  When a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 13a, it is determined whether or not the data set in the normal symbol holding number (G) storage area is less than 4, and the normal symbol holding number (G) is stored. If the area is less than 4, 1 is added to the normal symbol reservation number (G) storage area. If the normal symbol holding number (G) storage area is not less than 4, the gate detection switch input process is terminated, and the current input control process is terminated.

  After adding 1 to the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area, the random number value for normal symbol determination, the random number value for stopping the normal symbol, and the random number value for normal time are acquired, and the various random number values acquired are It memorize | stores in the predetermined memory | storage part (0th memory | storage part-4th memory | storage part) in a symbol holding | maintenance storage area.

(First start port detection switch input process of main control board 110)
The first start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the first start port detection switch 14a has been input.
When the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 14a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2. When the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 14a is not input, the current first time is detected. The start port detection switch input process is terminated.

  In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating the payout number corresponding to the first start port 14 to the prize ball counter.

  In step S230-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the data set in the first special symbol hold count (U1) storage area is less than 4. If the data set in the first special symbol hold count (U1) storage area is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S230-4, and is set in the first special symbol hold count (U1) storage area. If the data is not less than 4, the current first start port detection switch input process is terminated.

  In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area and stores it.

  In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a acquires a random number value for determining a special symbol, and searches for a free storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol random number value storage area. The acquired special symbol determination random number value is stored in the storage unit.

  In step S230-6, the main CPU 110a obtains the jackpot symbol random number value, and searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol random value storage area. The random number for jackpot symbol acquired is stored in the storage unit.

  In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a acquires the random number value for the small hit symbol, and searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol random value storage area. The small random number value for the small hit symbol is stored in the storage unit.

  In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a acquires a random number value for reach determination and a random number value for special figure fluctuation, and searches for an empty storage part in order from the first storage part in the first special symbol random value storage area. The reach determination random number value and the special figure variation random number value are stored in a free storage unit.

  As described above, in the predetermined storage unit of the first special symbol random value storage area, the random symbol value for special symbol determination, the random number value for big hit symbol, the random number value for small hit symbol, the random number value for reach determination, and the special symbol fluctuation random number The numerical value will be stored.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a performs a preliminary determination process.
In this pre-determination process, the jackpot lottery pre-determination table shown in FIG. 11A is referred to, the special symbol display device type, the special symbol determination random number value acquired this time, the jackpot symbol random number value, the reach determination random number value, and the special determination random number value. Based on the figure variation random value, start winning information for indicating the start opening determination information in advance is determined.

  In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets a start prize designation command based on the start prize information determined in the pre-determination process in step S230-9, and a start prize designation command in the effect transmission data storage area.

  As a result, the start winning information can be transmitted to the effect control board 120 as the start winning designation command, and the sub CPU 120a of the effect control board 120 that has received the start winning designation command analyzes the start winning designation command, A predetermined effect can be executed in advance before the change display of the special symbol triggered by the winning of a game ball at one start opening is started.

  In step S230-11, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the first special symbol hold count (U1) and corresponds to the first special symbol hold count (U1) updated in step S230-4. The first special symbol memory designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area, and the current first start port detection switch input process is terminated.

  In the second start port detection switch input process, similarly to the steps S230-9 to S230-11, winning information is generated with reference to the prior determination table shown in FIG. 11B, and the starting winning based on the winning information is generated. A special symbol memory designation command corresponding to the designation command and the second special symbol hold count (U2) is transmitted to the effect control board 120.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board 110)
With reference to FIG. 17, the special figure special power control process of the main control board 110 will be described.

First, in step S301, the value of the special figure special electricity processing data is loaded, the branch address is referred to from the special figure special electric treatment data loaded in step S302, and if the special figure special electric treatment data = 0, the special symbol memory determination process (step The process proceeds to S310). If the special symbol special power processing data = 1, the process proceeds to the special symbol variation processing (step S320). If the special symbol special power processing data = 2, the special symbol stop processing (step S330) is performed. If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the process moves to the jackpot game processing (step S340), and if the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the process moves to the big hit game end process (step S350). If special electric processing data = 5, the processing is shifted to the small hit game processing (step S360).
This “special drawing special electricity processing data” is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electricity control processing as will be described later, so that the subroutine necessary for the game is appropriately processed. .

  In the special symbol memory determination process in step S310, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination process, a special symbol determination process for determining a special symbol to be stopped and displayed, a variation time determination process for determining a variation time of the special symbol, and the like. This special symbol memory determination process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  In the special symbol variation process of step S320, the main CPU 110a performs a process of determining whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed. When the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the special symbol stop of step S330. Process to be transferred to the process. This special symbol variation process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  In the special symbol stop process in step S330, the main CPU 110a performs a process corresponding to the special symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol, lost symbol) that is stopped and displayed, and the number of time reductions (J), short time game flag, high A probability game count (X) and a high probability game flag are set. This special symbol stop process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  In the jackpot game process of step S340, the main CPU 110a performs a process of controlling the jackpot game. The jackpot game process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  In the jackpot game ending process in step S350, the main CPU 110a determines the probability game state of either the high probability game state or the low probability game state, and changes the game state of either the short-time game state or the non-time-short game state. Perform the decision process. The jackpot game end process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  In the small hit game process of step S360, the main CPU 110a performs a process of controlling the small hit game. This small hit game process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol memory determination process of main control board 110)
The special symbol memory determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S <b> 310-1, the main CPU 110 a determines whether or not the special symbol variation display is being performed.
If the special symbol variation display is in progress (special symbol time counter ≠ 0), the main CPU 110a ends the special symbol storage determination process this time, and if the special symbol variation display is not in progress (special symbol time counter = 0). The process proceeds to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, when the special symbol is not changing, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol hold count (U2) storage area is 1 or more.
If the main CPU 110a determines that the second special symbol hold count (U2) storage area is 1 or more, the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S310-3, and the second special symbol hold count (U2) storage area is not 1 or more. In that case, the process proceeds to step S310-4.

  In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the value stored in the second special symbol hold count (U2) storage area and updates it.

In step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is 1 or more.
When the main CPU 110a determines that the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is 1 or more, the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S310-5, and the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is not 1 or more. In this case, the current special symbol memory determination process is terminated.

  In step S310-5, the main CPU 110a updates by subtracting 1 from the value stored in the first special symbol hold count (U1) storage area.

  In step S310-6, the main CPU 110a performs a shift process on the data stored in the special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the special symbol reserved number (U) storage area subtracted in steps S310-2 to S310-5. . Specifically, each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit in the first special symbol random number storage region or the second special symbol storage region is shifted to the previous storage unit. Here, the data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the determination storage area (the 0th storage unit). At this time, since the data stored in the first storage unit is overwritten on the determination storage area (the 0th storage section), the data already written in the determination storage area (the 0th storage section) is special. It will be erased from the symbol holding storage area. As a result, the special symbol determination random number value, the big hit symbol random number value, the small hit symbol random number value, the reach determination random number value, and the special symbol variation random value used in the previous game are deleted.

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol storage area is shifted in preference to the first special symbol random value storage area in steps S310-2 to S310-6. The first special symbol random value storage area or the second special symbol storage area may be shifted, or the first special symbol random value storage area may be shifted with priority over the second special symbol storage area.

  In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a, based on the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area or the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area subtracted in step S310-2 or step S310-4. Then, the special symbol memory designation command is determined, and the determined special symbol memory designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  In step S311, the main CPU 110a stores the data (special symbol determination random number value, jackpot symbol random number value, small hit value) written in the determination symbol storage area (0th storage unit) of the special symbol hold storage area in step S310-6. The jackpot determination process is executed based on the design random number. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S312, the main CPU 110a performs a variation pattern determination process for determining a variation pattern of the special symbol. The variation pattern determination process refers to the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10A or FIG. 10B. U), the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the acquired reach determination random value and the special diagram variation random value.

  In step S313, the main CPU 110a sets a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in step S312 in the effect transmission data storage area.

  In step S314, the main CPU 110a confirms the gaming state at the start of variation, and sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area.

  In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) based on the variation pattern determined in step S312 in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is subtracted every 4 ms in S110.

  In step S316, the main CPU 110a sets variation display data for causing the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 to perform special symbol variation display (LED blinking) in a predetermined processing area. . As a result, when the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the LED lighting / extinguishing data is appropriately created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700. Variation display of the special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 is performed.

  In step S317, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special processing data = 1, makes preparations for shifting to the special symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 20, and ends the special symbol storage determination processing this time.

(Large hit judgment processing of the main control board 110)
The jackpot determination process for the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol determination random number value written in the determination storage area (the 0th storage unit) in step S310-6 is a "big hit" random value. .

  Specifically, when the special symbol holding storage area shifted in step S310-6 is the first special symbol random value storage area, the jackpot determination table of the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. When the special symbol holding storage area shifted in the above step S310-6 is the second special symbol storage area, the special symbol determination is made with reference to the jackpot determination table of the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the random value is “big hit”. As a result of the determination, the process proceeds to step S311-2 if it is determined to be a big hit, and the process proceeds to step S311-5 if it is not determined to be a big win.

  In step S311-2, the main CPU 110a determines the jackpot symbol random number value written in the determination symbol storage area (0th storage unit) of the special symbol reservation storage area in step S310-6, and determines the special symbol type ( The stop special symbol data) is determined, and the jackpot symbol determination process for setting the determined stop special symbol data in the stop special symbol data storage area is performed.

  Specifically, referring to the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 6B, the type of special symbol to be stopped is determined based on the jackpot symbol random number value written in the determination storage area (the 0th storage unit). The stop special figure data to be shown is determined, and the determined stop special figure data is set in the stop special figure data storage area.

  The determined special symbol is used to determine “big hit” or “small hit” in the special symbol stop process of FIG. 21, as will be described later, and the big hit game process of FIG. 22 or the small hit of FIG. It is also used to determine the operating mode of the big prize opening in the game process, and is also used to determine the gaming state after the big hit in the big hit game end process of FIG.

  In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a determines an effect symbol designating command based on the jackpot stop special symbol data determined in step S311-2, and the determined effect symbol designating command is stored in the effect transmission data storage area. set.

  In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a determines the gaming state at the time of winning the big win from the information set in the gaming state storage area (the short time gaming flag storage area, the high probability gaming flag storage area), and the gaming state at the time of winning the big win Is set in the game state buffer. Specifically, if both the short-time game flag and the high-probability game flag are not set, 00H is set. If the short-time game flag is not set but the high-probability game flag is set, 01H is set. If the short-time game flag is set but the high-probability game flag is not set, 02H is set. If both the short-time game flag and the high-probability game flag are set, 03H is set.

  In this way, apart from the game state storage area (time-short game flag storage area, high-probability game flag storage area), the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is set in the game state buffer. Since the high-probability game flag and the short-time game flag in the state storage area (time-short game flag storage area, high-probability game flag storage area) are reset, after the jackpot ends, based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot This is because the game state storage area cannot be referred to when determining the game state at the time of the big hit. For this reason, by providing a game state buffer for storing game information indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot separately from the gaming state storage area, by referring to the game information in the game state buffer after the end of the jackpot, Based on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, it is possible to newly set the gaming state after the jackpot (such as the short-time gaming state and the number of short-time games).

  In step S311-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol determination random number value written in the determination storage area (the 0th storage unit) in step S310-6 is a “small hit” random value. To do. If it is determined to be a small hit, the process proceeds to step S311-6. If it is not determined to be a small hit, the process proceeds to step S311-8.

  Specifically, when the special symbol holding storage area shifted in step S310-6 is the first special symbol random value storage area, the jackpot determination table of the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. When the special symbol holding storage area shifted in the above step S310-6 is the second special symbol storage area, the special symbol determination is made with reference to the jackpot determination table of the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the random number value is “small hit”.

  In step S 311-6, the main CPU 110 a determines the random number value for the small hit symbol written in the determination storage area (the 0th storage unit) of the special symbol holding storage area in step S 310-6, and determines the type of the special symbol. And the small hit symbol determination process for setting the determined stop special figure data in the stop special figure data storage area is performed.

  Specifically, referring to the symbol determination table of FIG. 6C, stop special symbol data indicating the type of special symbol is determined based on the random number value for the small hit symbol, and the determined stop special symbol data is Set in the stop special map data storage area.

  In step S311-7, the main CPU 110a determines an effect symbol designating command based on the stop special symbol data determined in step S311-6, and transmits the determined effect symbol designating command to the effect transmission data storage area. And the current jackpot determination process is terminated.

  In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a refers to the symbol determination table of FIG. 6A to determine a special symbol for loss, and sets the determined stop special data for loss in the stop special symbol data storage area. To do.

  In step S311-9, the main CPU 110a determines an effect symbol designating command based on the stop special map data determined in step S311-8, and the determined effect symbol designating command is stored in the effect transmission data storage area. Set and finish the current jackpot determination process.

(Special design variation processing of main control board 110)
The special symbol variation process will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation time of the special symbol set in step S315 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0).
When the main CPU 110a determines that the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S320-2, and when it determines that the variation time of the special symbol has not elapsed, the main CPU 110a performs the special symbol variation processing of this time. finish.

  In step S320-2, if the main CPU 110a determines that the set time has elapsed, the main CPU 110a clears the variable display data set in step S316, and performs steps S311-2, S311-6, and S311. Stop special symbol data for causing the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 to stop display the special symbol set in -8 is set in a predetermined display processing area. Thereby, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21, and the player is notified of the jackpot determination result.

  In step S320-3, the main CPU 110a sets a symbol determination command in the effect transmission data storage area.

  In step S320-4, when the main CPU 110a starts the special symbol stop display as described above, the main CPU 110a sets the symbol stop time (0.5 seconds = 125 counter) in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is updated by subtracting 1 every 4 ms in S110.

  In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a sets 2 in the special symbol special electric processing data, prepares for shifting to the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 21, and ends the special symbol variation processing of this time.

(Special symbol stop processing of main control board 110)
The special symbol stop process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol stop time set in step S320-4 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0). As a result, if it is determined that the stop time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S330-2. If it is determined that the stop time has not elapsed, the special symbol stop process of this time is terminated.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time-saving game flag is set in the time-saving game flag storage area, and if the flag is set in the time-saving game flag storage area, ) 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions (J) stored in the storage area and updated to determine whether the new time reduction number (J) is “0”. As a result, when the number of time reduction (J) is “0”, the time reduction game flag set in the time reduction game flag storage area is cleared, and when the number of time reduction (J) is not “0”, the time reduction The process moves to step S330-3 while the short-time game flag stored in the game flag storage area is set. On the other hand, if the hour / short game flag is not set in the hour / short game flag storage area, the process directly proceeds to step S330-3.

  In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area, and when the high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area. Is updated by subtracting 1 from the high probability game count (X) stored in the high probability game count (X) storage area to determine whether or not the new high probability game count (X) is “0”. To do. As a result, when the high probability game count (X) is “0”, the high probability game flag stored in the high probability game flag storage area is cleared and the high probability game count (X) is “0”. If not, the process proceeds to step S330-4 while the high probability game flag stored in the high probability game flag storage area is set. On the other hand, if the high-probability game flag is not set in the high-probability game flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-4.

  In step S330-4, the main CPU 110a confirms the current gaming state and sets a gaming state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area.

  In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the stop special figure data stored in the stop special figure data storage area is a jackpot symbol (stop special figure data = 01 to 07?). If it is determined that the jackpot symbol is determined, the process proceeds to step S330-6. If the symbol is not determined to be a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-11.

  In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a resets the gaming state and the number of time reductions. Specifically, the data stored in the high probability game flag storage area, the high probability game count (X) storage area, the short time game flag storage area, and the short time count (J) storage area is cleared.

  In step S330-7, the main CPU 110a sets 3 in the special figure special power processing data, and prepares for shifting to the jackpot game processing shown in FIG.

  In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a performs jackpot start preparation setting processing.

  In this jackpot start preparation setting process, referring to the special electric accessory actuating mode determination table shown in FIG. 8, based on the stop special chart data, the jackpot big winning opening opening mode determination table shown in FIG. From the group, one of the big winning opening opening determination tables of “first big hit TBL”, “second big hit TBL”, “third big hit TBL”, and “fourth big hit TBL” is determined.

  In step S330-9, the main CPU 110a determines the type of special game (first jackpot game to fourth jackpot game) based on the big prize opening opening determination table determined in step S330-13 or step S330-8. , A small hit game) is determined, and an opening designation command corresponding to the type of special game is set in the transmission data storage area for effects.

  In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a sets the start interval time in the special game timer counter based on the big winning opening opening determination table determined in step S330-13 or step S330-8. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110. When this process ends, the current special symbol stop process ends.

  In step S330-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a small hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the stop special figure data stored in the stop special figure data storage area is a small hit symbol (stop special figure data = 20, 21, 30, 31). If it is determined that the symbol is a small hit symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-12. If it is not determined to be a small symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-14.

  In step S330-12, the main CPU 110a sets 5 in the special figure special electric processing data, and prepares for shifting to the small hit game processing shown in FIG.

  In step S330-13, the main CPU 110a performs a small hitting start preparation setting process, and moves the process to step S330-9.

  In this small hitting start preparation setting process, referring to the special electric accessory actuating mode determination table shown in FIG. 8, the small hitting opening mode is determined based on the stop special chart data as shown in FIG. 9B. The big winning opening opening determination table ("small hit TBL") for the small hit shown is determined.

  In step S330-14, the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the special symbol special processing data, prepares to move to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG. 18, and ends the special symbol stop processing of this time.

(Big hit game processing of the main control board 110)
The jackpot game process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently opening. Specifically, if “0” is stored in the round game count (R) storage area, it is currently being opened, so it is determined whether the round game count (R) storage area is currently open. To do. If it is determined that the current opening is being performed, the process proceeds to step S340-2. If it is determined that the current opening is not currently performed, the process proceeds to step S340-6.

  In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the start interval time determined in step S330-10 has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and if the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the start interval time has elapsed. As a result, if the start interval time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process is terminated, and if the start interval time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-3.

  In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot start setting process.

  In the jackpot start setting process, “1” is added to the current round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area and stored. Here, since no round game has been performed yet, “1” is stored in the round game count (R) storage area.

  In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a performs a special prize opening process.

  In the big prize opening opening process, first, “1” is added to the opening number (K) stored in the opening number (K) storage area and updated. Also, in order to open the first grand prize opening / closing door 16b or the second big prize opening / closing door 17b, energization data for energizing the first big prize opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second big prize opening / closing solenoid 17c is set. At the same time, with reference to the big winning opening opening determination table (see FIG. 9A) determined in step S330-8, the number of round games (R) and the number of opening (K) The opening time of the first grand prize opening 16 or the second big prize opening 17 is set in the special game timer counter.

  In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not K = 1. If K = 1, in order to transmit information on the number of rounds to the effect control board 120, the number of round games ( In response to (R), a grand prize opening (R) round designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area. For example, since the number of round games (R) is set to “1” and K = 1 at the start of the first round of jackpot, the winning prize opening 1 round designation command is transmitted to the effect transmission data storage area. Set to. On the other hand, if K = 1 is not set, the jackpot game process is terminated without setting the big winning opening (R) round designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. In other words, the case where K = 1 means the start of a round, and therefore, the winning prize opening (R) round designation command is transmitted only at the start of the round.

  In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently ending. Ending here refers to processing after all preset round games have been completed. Therefore, if it is determined that the current ending is in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-18. If it is determined that the current ending is not currently performed, the process proceeds to step S340-7.

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special winning opening is being closed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the first big prize opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second big prize opening / closing solenoid 17c is set. As a result, if it is determined that the special winning opening is closed, the process proceeds to step S340-8, and if it is determined that the special winning opening is not closed, the process proceeds to step S340-9.

  In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time set in step S340-10 described later has elapsed. The closing time is set in the special game timer counter in the same manner as the start interval time in step S340-10 to be described later, and is determined by whether or not the special game timer counter = 0. As a result, if the closing time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process is terminated in order to maintain the closing of the big winning opening, and if the closing time has elapsed, the winning opening is opened in step S340- The process is moved to 4.

  In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an “opening end condition” for ending the opening of the special winning opening is satisfied.

This “opening end condition” means that the value of the winning prize entrance counter (C) has reached the specified number (9) or that the opening time per time in the number of opening (K) has passed (special Game timer counter = 0).
If it is determined that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S340-10. If it is determined that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied, the current jackpot game process is ended.

  In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening closing process.

  In the big prize opening closing process, the first big prize opening opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second big prize opening opening / closing solenoid 17c is energized to close the first big prize opening opening / closing door 16b or the second big prize opening opening / closing door 17b. Stop energization data. Next, referring to the big winning opening opening determination table (FIG. 9A) determined in step S330-8, based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of times open (K), The closing time (closing interval time or one closing time) of the first grand prize opening 16 or the second big prize opening 17 is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the big prize opening is closed.

In step S340-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not one round has been completed. Specifically, one round is based on the condition that the value of the winning entry entrance counter (C) has reached a specified number (9) or that the number of times of opening (K) is the maximum number of times of opening. Since the process ends, it is determined whether or not such a condition is satisfied.
If it is determined that one round is completed, the process proceeds to step S340-12. If it is determined that one round is not completed, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

  In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a performs a round data initialization process in which 0 is set in the number-of-openings (K) storage area and 0 is set in the number-of-stakes (C) storage area. That is, the number-of-openings (K) storage area and the number of balls received in the big prize opening (C) storage area are cleared. However, the round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area is not cleared.

  In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area is the maximum. If the round game number (R) is the maximum, the process proceeds to step S340-15, and if the round game number (R) is not the maximum, the process proceeds to step S340-14.

  In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the current round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area and stores it, and performs the current jackpot game process. finish.

  In step S340-15, the main CPU 110a resets the round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area.

  In step S340-16, the main CPU 110a determines the type of special game (long win game, short win game) based on the special winning opening opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9A) determined in step S330-8. , A game per development) is determined, and an ending designation command corresponding to the type of the special game is set in the effect transmission data storage area for transmission to the effect control board 120.

  In step S340-17, the main CPU 110a sets the end interval time corresponding to the jackpot type based on the big winning opening opening determination table (see FIG. 9A) determined in step S330-8 to the special game. Set to timer counter.

  In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set end interval time has elapsed. If it is determined that the end interval time has elapsed, in step S340-19, the main CPU 110a 4 is set in the special electric processing data, and preparation is made for shifting to the jackpot game end processing shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the end interval time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

(Big hit game end processing of the main control board 110)
The jackpot game end process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S350-1, the main CPU 110a loads the stop special figure data set in the stop special figure data storage area and the game information in the game state buffer.

  In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot end setting data table shown in FIG. 7, and at the time of jackpot end based on the stop special data loaded in S350-1 and the game information in the game state buffer. Processing for determining whether or not to set a high probability flag in the high probability game flag storage area is performed. For example, if the stop special figure data is “01”, the high probability flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area.

  In step S350-3, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot end setting data table shown in FIG. 7, and based on the stop special data loaded in S350-1 and the game information in the game state buffer, the high probability game A predetermined number of times is set in the storage state remaining number of times (X) storage area. For example, if the stop special figure data is “01”, 84 times is set in the remaining fluctuation count (X) storage area of the high probability gaming state.

  In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot end setting data table shown in FIG. 7, and based on the stop special data loaded in S350-1 and the game information in the game state buffer, the short-time game flag. Whether or not to set the short-time game flag in the storage area is processed. For example, when the stop special chart data is “04” and the game information in the game state buffer is 00H, the time-short game flag is not set in the time-short game flag storage area, but the game information in the game state buffer is 01H, 02H. Alternatively, when the time is 03H, the time-short game flag is set in the time-short game flag storage area.

  In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot end setting data table shown in FIG. 7, and based on the stop special data loaded in S350-1 and the game information in the game state buffer, the short-time game state The remaining number of fluctuations (J) is set to a predetermined number in the storage area. For example, when the stop special chart data is “04” and the game information in the game state buffer is 00H, the remaining change count (J) storage area of the short-time game state is set to 0, and the game in the game state buffer When the information is 01H, 02H, or 03H, 80 is set in the remaining change count (J) storage area of the short-time gaming state.

  In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a confirms the gaming state and sets a gaming state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area.

  In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a sets 0 to the special symbol special electric processing data, prepares to move to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG. 18, and ends the current jackpot game end processing.

(Small hit game processing of the main control board 110)
The small hit game process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S360-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently opening. If it is determined that it is currently opening, the process proceeds to step S360-2, and if it is determined that it is not currently opening, the process proceeds to step S360-4.

  In step S360-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the start interval time determined in step S330-10 has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and if the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the start interval time has elapsed. As a result, if the start interval time has not elapsed, the current small hit game process is terminated, and if the start interval time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S360-3.

In step S360-3, the main CPU 110a performs a big prize opening process.
In the special winning opening opening process, first, “1” is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area and stored. In addition, in order to open the first big prize opening 16, energization data for energizing the first big prize opening opening / closing solenoid 16c is set, and the release mode determination table determined in step S330-13 (FIG. 9B). )), The opening time of the first big prize opening 16 is set in the special game timer counter based on the number of times of opening (K).

  In step S360-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently ending. Ending here refers to processing after the game of the preset number of times of opening (K) has been completed. Therefore, if it is determined that the current ending is in progress, the process proceeds to step S360-13. If it is determined that the current ending is not currently performed, the process proceeds to step S360-5.

  In step S360-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first big prize winning opening 16 is being closed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the first big prize opening opening / closing solenoid 16c is set. If it is determined that the first big prize opening 16 is closed, the process proceeds to step S360-6. If it is determined that the first big prize opening 16 is not closed, the process goes to step S360-7. Move.

  In step S360-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time set in step S360-8 described later has elapsed. The closing time is set in the special game timer counter in the same manner as the start interval time in step S360-8, which will be described later, and is determined by whether or not the special game timer counter = 0. As a result, when the closing time has not elapsed, the small hit game process is terminated in order to maintain the closing of the first big winning opening 16, and when the closing time has elapsed, the first big winning opening In order to release 16, the process proceeds to step S 360-3.

  In step S <b> 360-7, the main CPU 110 a determines whether or not an “opening end condition” for ending the opening of the first big winning opening 16 is satisfied.

This “opening end condition” means that the value of the winning prize entrance counter (C) has reached the specified number (9) or that the opening time per time in the number of opening (K) has passed (special Game timer counter = 0).
If it is determined that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S360-8. If it is determined that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied, the present small hit game process is ended.

In step S360-8, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening closing process.
The big prize opening closing process stops the energization data for energizing the first big prize opening opening / closing solenoid 16c to close the first big prize opening 16, and the opening mode determination table determined in step S330-13. Referring to (see FIG. 9B), the closing time of the first big winning opening 16 is set in the special game timer counter based on the current number of times of opening (K). As a result, the first grand prize winning opening 16 is closed.

In step S360-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the small hit end condition is satisfied. Specifically, in the case of one small hit, it means that the value of the big winning entrance entrance counter (C) has reached a specified number (for example, 9) or that the number of times of opening (K) is the maximum number of times of opening. Since the process ends, it is determined whether such a condition is satisfied.
If it is determined that the small hit end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S360-10. If it is determined that the small hit end condition is not satisfied, the small hit game process is ended.

  In step S360-10, the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the number-of-openings (K) storage area and sets 0 in the number-of-stakes (C) storage area. That is, the number-of-openings (K) storage area and the number of balls received in the big prize opening (C) storage area are cleared.

  In step S360-11, the main CPU 110a sets an ending command corresponding to the type of small hits in the effect transmission data storage area in order to transmit to the effect control board 120.

  In step S360-12, the main CPU 110a refers to the release mode determination table (see FIG. 9B) determined in step S330-13, and determines the end interval time according to the small hit type as a special game timer. Set to counter.

  In step S360-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set end interval time has elapsed. If it is determined that the end interval time has elapsed, in step S360-14, the main CPU 110a When the figure special electric processing data is set to 0, preparation is made to move to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 18, and when it is determined that the end interval time has not elapsed, the current small hit game process is ended.

(Main control board power control processing of the main control board 110)
The ordinary power transmission control process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S401, the value of the ordinary map electric power processing data is loaded, and the branch address is referenced from the loaded ordinary electric power processing data in step S402. The process is moved to (Step S410), and if the ordinary power / general power process data = 1, the process is moved to the ordinary electric accessory control process (Step S420). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27.

(Normal design variation processing of the main control board)
The normal symbol variation process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol variation display is in progress. If the normal symbol variation display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S410-9, and if the normal symbol variation display is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S410-2.

  In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol hold count (G) stored in the normal symbol hold count (G) storage area is 1 or more when the normal symbol fluctuation display is not being performed. To do. When the number of holds (G) is “0”, the normal symbol variation display is not performed, and thus the normal symbol variation process is terminated.

  In step S410-3, when the main CPU 110a determines in step S410-2 that the number of retained ordinary symbols (G) is equal to or greater than “1”, the main CPU 110a stores the number of retained ordinary symbols in the ordinary symbol (G) storage area. A new hold number (G) obtained by subtracting “1” from the stored value (G) is stored.

  In step S410-4, the main CPU 110a performs a shift process on the normal symbol determination random number value stored in the normal symbol hold storage area. Specifically, each random number value stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit. At this time, the random number for normal symbol determination stored in the first storage unit of the normal symbol hold storage area is written to the determination storage area (the 0th storage unit) of the normal symbol hold storage area and is already determined. The random number value written in the (0th storage unit) is normally erased from the symbol reserved storage area.

In step S410-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol determination random number value stored in the determination storage unit (the 0th storage unit) of the normal symbol hold storage area is “winning”.
Specifically, with reference to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 12A, it is determined whether or not the acquired normal symbol determination random number value is hit against the above table. For example, according to the above table, in the non-short game state, it is determined that one normal symbol determination random value of “0” among the random numbers “0” to “15” is a win, If there are 15 random numbers for “0” to “14” among the random numbers “0” to “15”, it is determined that 15 normal symbol determination random numbers are successful, and the other random numbers are determined to be lost.

  In step S410-6, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol determination process with reference to the determination result of the hit determination process in step S410-5.

  This normal symbol determination process refers to the stop symbol determination table shown in FIG. 12 (b), and based on the current short time gaming state, the normal symbol lottery result, and the acquired random number value for normal symbol stop. The normal symbol (stop normal pattern data) to be stopped is determined, and the determined stop normal map data is set in the stop normal map data storage area. Then, the main CPU 110a sets a general map designation command based on the determined stop normal map data in the effect transmission data storage area, and transmits information of the stop normal map data to the effect control board 120.

  In step S410-7, the main CPU 110a performs normal symbol variation time determination processing.

  This normal symbol variation time determination process refers to the variation time determination table shown in FIG. 12 (c), the current short-time gaming state, the normal symbol lottery result, and the acquired normal symbol time random number value. Based on the above, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined. Then, a counter corresponding to the determined variation time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol time counter. The normal symbol time counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  Furthermore, in the normal symbol change time determination process, after the normal symbol change time is determined, the normal symbol change designation command based on the determined normal symbol change time is set in the transmission data storage area for production. Information on the variation time of the symbol is transmitted to the effect control board 120.

  In step S410-8, the main CPU 110a starts normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display device 22. The normal symbol variation display is to blink the LED at a predetermined interval in the normal symbol display device 22. This normal symbol variation display is continuously performed for the time set in step S410-7. When this process ends, the current normal symbol variation process ends.

  In step S410-9, when the main CPU 110a determines in step S410-1 that the normal symbol variation display is being performed, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set variation time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol time counter = 0. As a result, if it is determined that the set variation time has not elapsed, it is necessary to continue the variation display as it is, and thus the normal symbol variation process is terminated.

  In step S410-10, when the main CPU 110a determines that the set variation time has elapsed, the main CPU 110a stops the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 22. At this time, the normal symbol display device 22 stops and displays the normal symbol (winning symbol or lost symbol) corresponding to the normal symbol data set in the stop normal symbol data storage area in step S410-6. Thereby, the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is notified to the player.

  In step S410-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol data set in the stop normal symbol data storage area is a winning symbol. If the normal symbol is a winning symbol, step S410 is performed. The process is shifted to -12, and when the set normal symbol is a lost symbol, the current normal symbol variation process is terminated.

  In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a sets the ordinary power transmission process data = 1, and shifts the processing to the ordinary electric accessory control process.

  In step S410-13, the main CPU 110a performs an opening mode determination process for determining the opening mode of the starting movable piece 15b of the second starting port 15.

  This open time setting process refers to the start port open mode determination table shown in FIG. 12D, and based on the stop normal data, the maximum number of open movable pieces 15b (S), open time, close time, Determine the interval time.

  In step S410-14, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time of the starting movable piece 15b determined in step S410-13 to the starting opening timer counter of the main RAM 110c.

  In step S410-15, the main CPU 110a starts energizing the start port opening / closing solenoid 15c, and ends the normal symbol variation process this time. As a result, the start movable piece 15b is activated and the second start port 15 is opened.

(Main electric board 110 control processing of the main electric circuit board)
The normal electric accessory control process will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S420-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a predetermined maximum number of prizes (for example, 10) has been won in the second starting port 15 during the ordinary electric accessory control process.
If it is determined that the maximum number of winning (for example, 10) has been won, the process proceeds to step S420-14, and if it is not determined that the maximum number of winning (for example, 10) has been won, step The processing is moved to S420-2.

In step S420-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time of the second start port 15 has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the start release timer counter = 0.
If it is determined that the opening time of the second start port 15 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S420-3, and if it is not determined that the opening time of the second start port 15 has elapsed, the current normal The electric accessory control process is terminated.

In step S420-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second start port 15 is closed. That is, it is determined whether energization start data is set in the start port opening / closing solenoid 15c.
If it is determined that the second start port 15 is closed, the process proceeds to step S420-6. If it is determined that the second start port 15 is not closed, the process proceeds to step S420-4. .

  In step S420-4, the main CPU 110a stops energization of the start port opening / closing solenoid 15c. Thereby, the 2nd starting port 15 returns to a closed mode, and it becomes impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter again.

  In step S420-5, the main CPU 110a sets the closing time of the starting movable piece 15b determined in step S410-13 in the starting closing timer counter of the main RAM 110c.

In step S420-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the second start port 15 has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the start / close timer counter = 0.
If it is determined that the closing time of the second starting port 15 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S420-7, and if it is not determined that the closing time of the second starting port 15 has elapsed, the current normal The electric accessory control process is terminated.

In step S420-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of times stored in the start opening number counter of the main RAM 110c has reached the maximum number of opening startable movable pieces 15b determined in step S410-13. .
If it is determined that the maximum number of releases has been reached, the process proceeds to step S420-14, and if it is determined that the maximum number of releases has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S420-8.

In step S420-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the interval time has started (timed). That is, it is determined in step S420-10 whether or not an interval started flag, which will be described later, is set.
If it is determined that the interval time has started, the process proceeds to step S420-11, and if it is determined that the interval time has not started, the process proceeds to step S420-9.

  In step S420-9, the main CPU 110a performs an opening number update process of adding 1 to the start opening number counter of the main RAM 110c.

  In step S420-10, the main CPU 110a sets the interval time of the startable movable piece 15b determined in step S410-13 to the start interval timer counter of the main RAM 110c and indicates that the interval time has started. The interval started flag is set in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the current ordinary electric accessory control process ends.

In step S420-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the interval time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the start interval timer counter = 0.
If it is determined that the interval time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S420-12. If it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed, the current ordinary electric accessory control process is terminated.

  In step S420-12, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time of the starting movable piece 15b determined in step S410-13 to the start opening timer counter of the main RAM 110c, and clears the interval started flag.

  In Step S420-13, the main CPU 110a starts energizing the start opening / closing solenoid 15c, and ends the current ordinary electric accessory control process. Thereby, the start movable piece 15b is actuated again, and the second start port 15 is opened again.

  In step S420-14, the main CPU 110a performs an opening mode initialization process for initializing various data stored in the start / open count counter, the start / release timer counter, the start / close timer counter, and the like of the main RAM 110c.

  In step S420-15, the main CPU 110a prepares to set the normal figure normal power process data = 0 and shifts to the normal symbol variation process of FIG. N, and ends the current normal electric accessory control process.

(Command explanation)
The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to which the description is partially omitted in the flowchart of the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120 will be described.

  The command transmitted from the main control board 110 to the production control board 120 is composed of 1-byte data, and 1-byte MODE information for identifying the control command classification and the control command to be executed. And 1-byte DATA information indicating the contents of.

The “designation designating command” indicates the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed, and DATA information is set according to the type of the special symbol. Since the special symbol type determines the jackpot type and the high probability gaming state as a result, it can be said that the effect symbol designation command indicates the jackpot type and the gaming state.
In the effect symbol designation command, when various special symbols are determined and the variation display of the special symbol is started, an effect symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is transmitted to the effect control board 120. Specifically, when the variation display of the special symbol is started in steps S311-3, S311-7, and S311-9, the effect symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is transmitted for the effect of the main RAM 110c. Set in the data storage area. Thereafter, the effect designating command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S700 is immediately transmitted to the effect control board 120.

The “first special symbol memory designation command” indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area, “MODE” is set to “E1H”, and the number of reserved memories DATA information is set according to the above.
This first special symbol memory designation command is effect-controlled by the first special symbol memory designation command corresponding to the number of reserved memories when the number of reserved memories stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is switched. It is transmitted to the substrate 120. Specifically, when the value stored in the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area increases or decreases in step S230-11 or step S310-7, the number corresponding to the holding memory number after increase / decrease is increased. One special symbol memory designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the first special symbol memory designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S700 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 120.

The “second special symbol memory designation command” indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area, “MODE” is set to “E2H”, and the number of reserved memories DATA information is set according to the above.
This second special symbol memory designation command is directed by the second special symbol memory designation command corresponding to the number of reserved memories when the number of reserved memories stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area is switched. It is transmitted to the substrate 120. Specifically, when the value stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area in step S240 or step S310-7 increases or decreases, the second special symbol corresponding to the increased or decreased number of reserved memories. The symbol memory designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the second special symbol memory designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S700 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 120.
In the present embodiment, the “first special symbol memory designation command” and the “second special symbol memory designation command” are collectively referred to as “special symbol memory designation command”.

The “design determination command” indicates that the special symbol is stopped and displayed, “MODE” is set to “E3H”, and “DATA” is set to “00H”.
This symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 in step S320-3, the symbol confirmation command is displayed in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Set. Thereafter, the symbol confirmation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S700 is immediately transmitted to the effect control board 120.

The “first special symbol variation pattern designation command” indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20, “MODE” is set to “E6H”, and various variations DATA information is set according to the pattern.
The first special symbol variation pattern designation command is a first special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined when the special symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 20 is started. A designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120. Specifically, when the variation display of the special symbol is started in step S313, the first special symbol variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol is stored in the effect RAM transmission data in the main RAM 110c. Set to area. Thereafter, the first special symbol variation pattern designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S700 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 120.

The “variable pattern designation command for the second special symbol” indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the second special symbol display device 21, and “MODE” is set to “E7H”, and various variations DATA information is set according to the pattern.
The second special symbol variation pattern designation command is a second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined when the special symbol variation display of the second special symbol display device 21 is started. A designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120. Specifically, when the variation display of the special symbol is started in step S313, the second special symbol variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol is stored in the effect RAM transmission data in the main RAM 110c. Set to area. Thereafter, the second special symbol variation pattern designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S700 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 120.
In the present embodiment, the “first special symbol variation pattern designation command” and the “second special symbol variation pattern designation command” are collectively referred to as a “variation pattern designation command”.

The “start winning designation command” is information for pre-determining the result of the jackpot lottery. “MODE” is set to “E8H” or “E9H” according to the special symbol display device, and various winning information is displayed. In addition, DATA information is set.
The start winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120 when the game ball wins the first starting opening 14 or the second starting opening 15 and corresponding to the determined starting winning information. Specifically, when a game ball wins at the first start port 14 or the second start port 15 in step S230-10 or S240, the start winning designation command corresponding to the determined winning information is displayed in the main RAM 110c. Set in the transmission data storage area. Thereafter, the start winning designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S700 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 120.

The “Big Winner Opening Specification Command” indicates the number of jackpot rounds according to various jackpot types, “MODE” is set as “EAH”, and DATA information is set according to the number of jackpot rounds Has been.
With regard to the special winning opening opening designation command, when the big hit round is started, the big winning opening opening designation command corresponding to the started round number is transmitted to the effect control board 120. Specifically, when the first grand prize opening opening / closing door 16b (or the second big prize opening opening / closing door 17b) is opened in step S340-5, the big winning opening opening designation corresponding to the number of rounds to be opened is designated. The command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, in step S700, the prize winning opening release command set in the effect transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the effect control board 120.

The “opening designation command” indicates that various jackpots start, “MODE” is set as “EBH”, and DATA information is set according to the jackpot type.
As for the opening designation command, when various jackpots start, an opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot is transmitted to the effect control board 120. Specifically, at the start of the jackpot game process in step S330-9, an opening designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. After that, the opening designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S700 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 120.

The “ending designation command” indicates that various jackpots have ended, “MODE” is set as “ECH”, and DATA information is set according to the jackpot type.
As for the ending designation command, when various jackpots are completed, the ending designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot is transmitted to the effect control board 120. Specifically, at the start of the jackpot game end process in step S340-16, an ending designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the ending designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S700 is immediately transmitted to the effect control board 120.

The “ordinary symbol designation command” indicates the type of the ordinary symbol that is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 22, “MODE” is set to “EDH”, and the DATA information is set according to the ordinary symbol type. Is set.
As for the ordinary symbol designation command, when various ordinary symbols are determined and the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started, the ordinary symbol designation command corresponding to the determined ordinary symbol is transmitted to the effect control board 120. Specifically, when the normal symbol variation display is started in step S410-6, a universal symbol designation command corresponding to the determined normal symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, in step S700, the ordinary drawing designation command set in the production transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the production control board 120.

The “ordinary symbol change designation command” indicates the variation time of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol display device 22, “MODE” is set to “EEH”, and DATA information is set in accordance with the variation times of various ordinary symbols. Is set.
When the normal symbol variation display command of the normal symbol display device 22 is started, the normal symbol variation designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120 in response to the determined normal symbol variation time. The Specifically, when the normal symbol fluctuation display is started in step S410-7, a universal symbol fluctuation designation command corresponding to the determined normal symbol fluctuation time is entered in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Set. After that, the ordinary figure change designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S700 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 120.

The “gaming state designation command” indicates whether it is a short-time gaming state or a non-short-time gaming state, and “MODE” is set to “EFH”, and if it is a non-short-time gaming state, “DATA” is “ “00H” is set, and “DATA” is set to “01H” in the time saving gaming state.
As for the gaming state designation command, a gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state is transmitted to the effect control board 120 at the start of special symbol variation, at the end of special symbol variation, at the start of jackpot game, and at the end of jackpot. . Specifically, when the special symbol variation display is started in step S314, there is a possibility that the high probability game flag, the high probability game number, the short time game flag, and the short time number (J) have been changed in step S330-4. When there is a high probability game flag, a high probability game count, a short-time game flag, and a short-time count (J) in step S350-6, the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state is the main. It is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the RAM 110c. Thereafter, the gaming state designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S700 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 120.

  Control contents of the effect control board 120 based on various commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120 as described above, or input signals from the effect button detection switch 35a received from the frame control board 180, etc. explain.

(Main process of production control unit 120m)
Processing executed by the sub CPU 120a in the effect control unit 120m will be described. First, the main process of the effect control unit 120m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a main process in the effect control unit 120m.

  In step S1000, the sub CPU 120a performs an initialization process. In this process, the sub CPU 120a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 120b and initializes and sets a flag stored in the sub RAM 120c in response to power-on.

  In step S1100, the sub CPU 120a performs a sub random number update process. In this process, the sub CPU 120a performs a process of updating various random numbers stored in the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process of step S1100 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit 120m)
The timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 120m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating timer interrupt processing in the effect control unit 120m. Although not shown, a clock pulse is generated every predetermined period (2 milliseconds) by a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control unit 120m, and a timer interrupt processing program is read, and the effect control unit A 120 m timer interruption process is executed.

  In step S1300, the sub CPU 120a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 120a to the stack area.

  In step S1400, the sub CPU 120a performs timer update processing for updating various timer counters used in the effect control unit 120m.

  In step S1500, the sub CPU 120a performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 120a performs a process of analyzing a command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 120c. A specific description of the command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30A and 30B.

  When the effect control unit 120m receives a command transmitted from the main control board 110, a command reception interrupt process of the effect control unit 120m (not shown) occurs, and the received command is stored in the reception buffer. Thereafter, in step S1500, the received command is analyzed.

  In step S1700, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the signals of the effect button detection switch 35a and the cross key detection switch 36b are input via the frame control board 180, and when the signals of the effect button detection switch 35a and the like are input. The effect input control process for transmitting the effect button signal or the like to the image control unit 150 is performed.

  In step S1800, the sub CPU 120a performs data output processing for transmitting various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c to the frame control board 180 and the image control unit 150.

  In step S1900, the sub CPU 120a restores the information saved in step S1300 to the register of the sub CPU 120a.

(Command analysis process of effect control unit 120m)
The command analysis process of the effect control unit 120m will be described with reference to FIGS. 30A and 30B. FIG. 30A is a diagram showing a command analysis process (1) in the effect control unit 120m. FIG. 30B is a diagram showing a command analysis process (2) in the effect control unit 120m. Note that the command analysis process (2) in FIG. 30B is performed subsequent to the command analysis process (1) in FIG. 30A.

  In step S1501, the sub CPU 120a checks whether there is a command in the reception buffer, and checks whether the command has been received. In this process, if there is a command in the reception buffer, the sub CPU 120a moves the process to step S1510. On the other hand, in this process, if there is no command in the reception buffer, the sub CPU 120a ends the current command analysis process.

  In step S1510, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a start winning designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a start winning designation command, the sub CPU 120a moves the process to step S1511. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not the start winning designation command, the sub CPU 120a moves the process to step S1520.

In step S1511, the sub CPU 120a performs start winning designation command storage processing.
In the start winning designation command storing process, the sub CPU 120a stores the starting winning designation command received from the main control board 110 in the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 120c. As described above, the type of “start winning designation command” is generated based on each start winning information shown in the pre-determination determination table in FIGS. 11A and 11B. The “start winning designation command 1” generated based on the “start winning designation command 38” generated based on the “start winning designation information 38” is included.

  The effect information storage area of the sub-RAM 120c is provided for each type of start opening (first effect information storage area and second effect information storage area). The sub CPU 120a analyzes the start winning designation command received from the main control board 110, confirms the type of the starting opening (first starting opening 14, second starting opening 15) related to the starting winning designation command, and The effect information storage area corresponding to the type is stored.

  Each effect information storage area is configured according to the special symbol reservation storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit for each type of start port. The start winning designation command is stored in order from the storage unit with the smallest number in the storage unit in which the start winning designation command is not stored.

  In addition to the “start prize designation command area” in which the “start prize designation command” is stored, each storage unit includes a “final aspect data area” for storing “final figure data” related to the special figure holding effect, and a special figure. A “special drawing hold effect control data area” for storing “special drawing hold effect control data” for controlling the content (scenario) of the special figure hold effect related to the hold effect.

“Final mode data” is data for determining the final mode of the special figure reservation image. Any final mode data is determined based on the start winning designation command.
In the present embodiment, four types of normal mode and special modes 1 to 3 are set as the final mode of the special figure reservation image. The normal embodiment is a standard embodiment (eg, “white round shape”). Special aspect 1 is an aspect (for example, “blue round shape”) that suggests that the degree of expectation (reliability) of the jackpot winning is low, and special aspect 2 is an aspect that indicates that the expectation of the jackpot winning is high The special mode 3 is a mode (for example, “yellow star shape”) that suggests that the jackpot winning is confirmed.

  "Special figure hold effect control data" determines whether or not the special figure hold image displayed at the time of starting winning a prize will not change until the last (erasure) (normal mode is maintained) or how it changes. It is data to be. Any final mode data is determined based on the start winning designation command.

  The sub CPU 120a stores “final mode data” and “special drawing hold effect control data” determined based on the start winning designation command, and based on the stored “final mode data” and “special drawing hold effect control data”. Then, the effect control of the special figure holding effect by the special figure holding image is performed.

For example, the sub CPU 120a selects “start prize designation command 1” corresponding to “start prize information 1”, “start prize designation command 3” corresponding to “start prize information 3”, and “start prize information 4” corresponding to “start prize information 4”. When the “start winning prize designation command 4” is received from the main control board 110, the special figure is suspended from the start winning prize based on the final mode data and the special figure holding effect control data determined based on these starting prize designation commands. Until the image is erased, the effect control for displaying the special figure reserved image in the normal mode (white round shape) is executed at the highest rate.
Further, for example, when the sub CPU 120a receives from the main control board 110 "start winning designation command 5" to "start winning designation command 16" corresponding to "start winning information 5" to "start winning information 16". Based on the final mode data and the special figure hold effect control data determined based on these start winning designation commands, the special figure hold image is changed to the “normal mode” at the time of winning up to the “special mode 1” of the final mode. The effect control to be displayed is executed at the highest rate.

Further, for example, when the sub CPU 120a receives from the main control board 110 “start winning designation command 17” to “start winning information 20” corresponding to “start winning information 17” to “start winning information 20”, Based on the final mode data and the special figure hold effect control data determined based on these start winning designation commands, the special figure hold image is changed to the “normal mode” at the time of winning and to the “special mode 2” of the final mode. The effect control displayed on the screen is executed at the highest rate.
Further, for example, when the sub CPU 120a receives from the main control board 110 "start winning designation command 21" to "start winning information 38" corresponding to "start winning information 21" to "start winning information 38", Based on the final mode data and the special figure hold effect control data determined based on these start winning designation commands, the special figure hold image is changed to the “normal mode” at the time of winning and to the “special mode 3” of the final mode. The effect control displayed on the screen is executed at the highest rate.

  In step S1520, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect designating command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect designating command, the sub CPU 120a moves the process to step S1521 and step S1522, and moves to step S1530 if it is not an effect designating command.

In step S1521, the sub CPU 120a performs a start winning designation command shift process.
In the start winning designation command shifting process, the sub CPU 120a shifts the starting winning designation command corresponding to the starting opening related to the received effect designating command.

  Specifically, the type of the start port related to the received effect designating command is confirmed, and the data stored in the effect information storage area corresponding to the start port is shifted. In the data shift process, each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit. For example, data stored in the fourth storage section of the first effect information storage area corresponding to the winning at the first start port 14 is shifted to the third storage section of the first effect information storage area. Further, the data stored in the first storage unit of the first effect information storage area is stored in the variable effect information storage area (the 0th storage unit) common to the first effect information storage area and the second effect information storage area. The data that has been shifted and stored in the variable effect information storage area is deleted.

  The sub CPU 120a sends a special figure hold display shift control command (a first special figure hold display shift control command or a second special figure hold display shift control command) indicating the type of start port related to the received effect designating command to the sub RAM 120c. Set to send buffer.

  The special figure hold display shift control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control unit 170 and the image control unit 150 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving the special figure hold display shift control command, the image control base unit 150 receives the special figure hold image (the first special figure hold image or the second special figure hold image) related to the start port indicated by the received special figure hold display shift control command. ) Is shifted.

  In step S1522, the sub CPU 120a performs an effect symbol pattern determination process. More specifically, the effect designating command is analyzed, and the effect design 38 to be stopped and displayed on the image display device 31 based on the information included in the received effect designating command, that is, the effect arranged on a predetermined effective line. The arrangement (combination) of symbols 38 (decorative symbols) is determined.

  In step S1530, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a variation pattern designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 120a moves the process to step S1531, and moves to step S1540 if it is not the variation pattern designation command.

  In step S1531, the sub CPU 120a performs a variation effect pattern determination process for determining a variation effect pattern that is a variation effect aspect constituting the lottery effect, and ends the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1540, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a symbol determination command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a symbol determination command, the sub CPU 120a shifts the processing to steps S1541 and S1542, and if not the symbol determination command, shifts the processing to step S1550.

  In step S1541, the sub CPU 120a sets an effect symbol stop control command indicating that the effect symbol 38 is stopped and displayed in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. The effect symbol stop control command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170 by the data output process of step S1800. The lamp control unit 170 and the image control unit 150 receive the effect symbol stop control command, recognize that the variation effect has ended, end the variation effect, and perform stop display of the effect symbol 38.

In step S1542, the sub CPU 120a performs an effect mode setting process for setting the effect mode when the special symbol variation display ends, and ends the command analysis process.
In the present embodiment, the effect mode is a variation effect classification mode (category) performed by an effect device composed of the image display device 31 or the like corresponding to special symbol determination (or special symbol variation display). Yes, it is associated with the state of the game conditions.

  In step S1550, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command, the sub CPU 120a moves the process to step S1551. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a gaming state designation command, the sub CPU 120a moves the process to step S1560.

  In step S1551, the sub CPU 120a sets data indicating the gaming state based on the received gaming state designation command in the gaming state storage area in the sub RAM 120c.

  In step S1560, the sub CPU 120a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening designation command, the sub CPU 120a moves the process to step S1561. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not an opening designation command, the sub CPU 120a moves the process to step S1570.

  In step S1561, the sub CPU 120a performs a hit start effect pattern determination process for determining a hit start effect pattern. In the hit start effect pattern determination process, a hit start effect pattern is determined based on the opening designation command, and the determined hit start effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area.

  Then, in order to transmit information on the determined hit start effect pattern to the image control unit 150, the lamp control unit 170, and the frame control board 180, an effect pattern designation command based on the determined hit start effect pattern is transmitted to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. Set to.

  In step S1570, the sub CPU 120a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special winning opening opening designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a special winning opening release designation command, the sub CPU 120a moves the process to step S1571. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 120a moves the process to step S1580 if it is not the big winning opening opening designation command.

  In step S1571, the sub CPU 120a performs a jackpot effect pattern determination process for determining a jackpot effect pattern. In the jackpot effect pattern determination process, a jackpot effect pattern is determined based on the big prize opening opening designation command, and the determined jackpot effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area.

  Then, in order to transmit the determined jackpot effect pattern information to the image control unit 150, the lamp control unit 170, and the frame control board 180, an effect pattern designation command based on the determined jackpot effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. To do.

  In step S1580, the sub CPU 120a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending designation command, the sub CPU 120a moves the process to step S1581. On the other hand, in this process, if the sub CPU 120a is not an ending designation command, the command analysis process for this time is terminated.

  In step S1581, the sub CPU 120a performs a hit end effect pattern determination process for determining a hit end effect pattern, and ends the current command analysis process. In the hit end effect pattern determination process, a hit end effect pattern is determined based on the ending designation command, and the determined hit end effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area.

  Then, in order to transmit information on the determined winning end effect pattern to the image control unit 150, the lamp control unit 170, and the frame control board 180, an effect pattern designation command based on the determined winning end effect pattern is transmitted to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. Set to.

(Change effect pattern determination process of effect control unit 120m)
The variation effect pattern determination process in the effect control unit 120m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a variation effect pattern determination process in the effect control unit 120m.

In step S1531-1, the sub CPU 120a checks the variation pattern designation command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 120c.
The sub ROM 120b stores a variation effect pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a variation effect pattern of a variation effect type (see FIGS. 10A and 10B) associated with the change pattern designation command. The variation effect pattern includes various effects by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect button 35, the first decorative member 33a, the second decorative member 33b and the third decorative member 33c, the panel lighting device 34a (LED), and the like. The effect mode is set, for example, the time of the change effect, the change display mode of the effect symbol 38, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the content of the reach effect, the effect button 35, the first decorative member 33a, the second decorative member An effect mode is set by 33b, the third decorative member 33c, the panel lighting device 34a, and the like. In the variation effect pattern of the variation effect in the image display device 31, a display mode related to the variable display of the effect design 38, a display mode related to the object image and the background image from the scene and the character are set.
In step S1531-1, the sub CPU 120a confirms the variation effect type associated with the variation pattern designation command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 120c in the variation effect pattern determination table of the sub ROM 120b.

  In step S1531-2, the sub CPU 120a acquires a random number for distribution (0 to 99) for determining the variation effect pattern in the variation effect pattern determination table. That is, the sub CPU 120a stores the random number indicated by the random number counter relating to the random number for distribution for determining the variation effect pattern in the distribution random number storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

In step S1531-3, the sub CPU 120a performs a process of determining the variation effect pattern by collating the distribution random number stored in the distribution random number storage area with the variation effect pattern determination table of the sub ROM 120c.
As will be described later, in this embodiment, for example, the operation ratio of the second decoration member 33b in the variation effect, the operation timing ratio of the second decoration member 33b, the execution rate of the commentary notice as the jackpot notice effect, and the jackpot confirmation The execution ratio of the effect, the ratio of the execution timing of the jackpot finalizing effect, and the execution rate of the effect (effect in which the effect button 35 protrudes) controlled to the state in which the effect button 35 protrudes (second state) are the variable effect pattern determination table. Is set in

In step S1531-4, the sub CPU 120a sets a variation effect control command corresponding to the determined variation effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. In step S1531-5, the sub effect control command (variation effect data) is set in the sub RAM 120c. Is set in the variable effect data storage area.
The variation effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control unit 170 and the image control unit 150 by the data output processing in step S1800. For example, when the image control unit 150 receives the variation effect control command, the image control unit 150 causes the image display device 31 to perform the variation display of the effect symbol 38 based on the variation effect pattern indicated by the command, and the variation effect corresponding to the command. An effect image based on the pattern is displayed on the image display device 31.

(Specific example of control processing of variation effect)
Here, a specific example will be described in which the sub CPU 120a performs control processing of the variation effect determined by the variation effect pattern determination processing of FIG.
32A to 32C, 36, and 38 are diagrams for explaining the temporal flow of the variation effect. 33A and 33B, FIG. 34A and FIG. 34B, FIG. 35A and FIG. 35B, FIG. 37, and FIG. 39 are diagrams showing examples of effect images displayed on the image display device 31 in the variable effect. 40 to 46B are diagrams showing examples of effect control information set and stored in the sub ROM 120b for each variable effect type.

(Special reach 1)
First, a description will be given of a variation effect whose variation effect type is “special reach (big hit) 1”. FIG. 32A is a diagram for explaining the temporal flow of the effect control of the variation effect of “special reach (big hit) 1”.
As shown in FIG. 32 (a), sub CPU120a, when to start variable display of the special symbols, in the period from the timing _{T 11} to time _{T 12} (a-1), the image display device a plurality of performance symbols 38 The “normal fluctuation” to display the fluctuation at 31 is executed. The sub CPU120a is "normal reach" in the period from the timing _{T 12} to time _{T 13} (a-2), "super reach" in the period from the timing _{T 13} to time _{T 14} (a-3), a timing _{T 14} From time T to timing T ₁₅ , “special reach (first half)”, from timing T ₁₅ to timing T ₁₆ , “special reach (second half)”, and from timing T ₁₆ to timing T ₁₇ , “re-lottery effect”, respectively. Run.

Sub CPU120a is the "normal variation" in the period from the timing _{T 11} to time _{T 12} (a-1), effect images (a-1) for variably displaying a plurality of performance symbol 38 shown in FIG. 33A the image display device The control to display on 31 is performed.

The sub CPU120a is the "normal reach" (the first stage reach demonstration of) in the period from the timing _{T 12} to time _{T 13} (a-2), in the image display device 31, the two symbols (left symbol of performance symbols And the right symbol) are stopped and displayed in the reach mode having the same numerical value (for example, 4), and the effect image of the reach effect (the effect image (FIG. 33A) shown in FIG. a-2)) is displayed.

This “special reach (big hit) 1” may or may not operate when the second decorative member 33b, which is a movable member, operates.
When the second decorative member 33b operates, an operation of moving from the “first standby position” to the “first operation position” is performed as described above. By such an operation of the second decoration member 33b, the possibility of the determination result of the jackpot determination being a determination result that the jackpot game is executed is notified (a jackpot notice effect).

The sub CPU 120a determines whether to operate or deactivate the second decorative member 33b based on the effect control information shown in FIG. When operating the second decoration member 33b, the sub CPU 120a operates the “first reach” at any one of the timings E _{11 to} E ₁₄ before the start of “super reach” (second stage reach effect) described later. The “first standby position” is moved to the “first operation position”. The sub CPU 120a determines at which timing of the timings E _{11 to} E ₁₄ to operate the second decorative member 33b based on the effect control information shown in FIG.
The timing at which the second decorative member 33b operates is not limited to this, and any timing may be used as long as it is before “super reach”.

Timing _{E 11, E 13,} respectively, by the player during operation lifetime _{Y 14, Y 15} to the pressing operation of the performance button 35 becomes effective presses the performance button 35, or the operation lifetime _{Y 14,} depressing operation of the performance button 35 into Y ₁₅ is a timing which the second decorative member 33b is operated by the at operating lifetime _{Y 14, Y 15} has elapsed without. On the other hand, timings E ₁₂ and E ₁₄ are timings at which the second decorative member 33b operates regardless of the pressing operation of the effect button 35.
When determining the timing E _11, that is, when setting the operation effective period Y ₁₄ , or when determining the timing E _13, that is, when setting the operation effective period Y ₁₅ , the sub CPU 120 a informs the player in the image display device 31. Control is performed to display an operation promotion notification image for prompting the operation of the effect button 35. The sub CPU 120a controls the effect button 35 so as not to protrude (first state) during the operation effective periods Y ₁₄ and Y ₁₅ .

Sub CPU120a is, to set the operating lifetime _{Y 14,} the player while operating lifetime _{Y 14} operates presses the performance button 35, for example, to operate the second decorative member 33b at the timing _{E 11.} Alternatively, the sub CPU120a, when without been depressed the performance button 35 during the operation lifetime _{Y 14} is operated lifetime _{Y 14} elapses, to operate the second decorative member 33b (after the operation lifetime _{Y 14} passed operation timing also the _{E 11).}
The sub CPU120a is, to set the operating lifetime _{Y 15,} the player while operating lifetime _{Y 15} operates presses the performance button 35, for example, to operate the second decorative member 33b at the timing _{E 13.} Alternatively, the sub CPU120a, when operating lifetime _{Y 15} without being pressed is operated lifetime _Y performance button 35 during ₁₅ has elapsed, operates the second decorative member 33b (after the operation lifetime _{Y 15} passed operation timing also an _{E 13).}

Even when the sub CPU 120a determines to deactivate the second decorative member 33b based on FIG. 40A described later, the operation is performed in the operation effective period Y ₁₄ and the operation effective period Y ₁₅ as described above. In this case, even if the player depresses the effect button 35 during the operation effective period Y ₁₄ and the operation effective period Y ₁₅ , the second decorative member 33 b does not operate.

Alternatively, the sub CPU120a, when determining the timing _{E 12} or timing _{E 14,} regardless of the pressing operation of the performance button 35 and operates the second decorative member 33b at the timing _{E 12} or timing _{E 14.}

  A specific example of the effect by the effect button 35, the second decorative member 33b, and the image display device 31 in the “special reach (big hit) 1” will be described later with reference to FIG.

Sub CPU120a at timing R ₁ in the "normal reach" period (a-2), based on the effect control information shown in FIG. 40 (c) described later, and the determination result of the jackpot determination result to execute the jackpot gaming A jackpot notice effect for notifying the fact that the jackpot is to be played, that is, a jackpot notice effect that gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot is executed. Jackpot announcement attraction that is executed at this timing R _1, for example, a commentary notice such to explain the effect contents of the next "super reach" advance, possibly jackpot gaming (special game) is executed by the notice content ( Expectations for jackpot (reliability)) are set differently. Note that this commentary notice is also a “reach notice” that suggests to the player that “normal reach” will evolve to “super reach”.

Sub CPU120a is in the "super reach" (reach demonstration of the second stage) in the period from the timing _{T 13} to time _{T 14} (a-3), the image display apparatus 31, an effect image that appeared character "M Child" Control for displaying the effect image (a-3) in FIG. 33A is performed. This “Super Reach” is a performance that has a higher probability of executing a jackpot game (special game) than the “Normal Reach” (expected degree of reliability (reliability)) than the “Normal Reach” character. It has become.

The sub CPU 120a notifies that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot based on the effect control information shown in FIG. "Direction" is executed. For example, the “big hit finalizing effect” is to output a predetermined sound effect from the audio output device 32 and turn on the LED or the like of the panel lighting device 34a. Sub CPU120a, when performing such a "big hit confirmation effect" is based on the effect control information shown in FIG. 40 (d) below, of the timing _P 11 _{to P 14} shown in FIG. 32 (a) Which timing is to be executed is determined.
Note that the execution timing of the “big hit finalizing effect” is not limited to the timing timings P _{11 to} P ₁₄ shown in FIG.

In addition, in the “special reach (big hit) 1”, the sub CPU 120a executes “super reach” of the period (a-3) as the first effect and then performs the period (a-4) to the period as the second effect. The “special reach” of (a-7) is executed. Before the “special reach” is executed, the third decorative member 33c is moved from the “third standby position” to the “third standby position” as described above. "Operating position".
Specifically, the sub CPU120a, in variation effect of "Special Reach (jackpot) 1", the second half of the timing E ₁₇ of the "super reach", "third third decorative member 33c from the" third standby position " To move to “Special Reach” as “Second Reproduction” different from “First Representation” by moving to “Operation Position” Inform the person.

Sub CPU120a, in variation effect of this "Special Reach (jackpot) 1" is set so as to always operate the third decorative member 33c at the timing _{E 17.}
Incidentally, the sub CPU120a at timing _{E 17,} may set the third decorative member 33c to operate at a predetermined rate. For example, in the “special reach (losing) 1”, which will be described later, the sub CPU 120a causes the third decorative member 33c to be 30% of the distribution random number value 0 to 99 (the distribution random number value 0 to 29). It is made to operate and is made non-operating at a ratio of 70% (random number for distribution 30 to 99). It is operated at a rate of 30% (random number for distribution 0 to 69) and inactive at a rate of 30% (random number 70 for distribution).
In this way, the sub CPU 120a sets the operation ratio so that the “special reach (big hit) 1” operates the third decoration member 33c at a higher ratio than the “special reach (losing) 1”. The operation of the third decorative member 33c notifies the possibility of the jackpot determination result being a determination result that the jackpot game is executed (a jackpot notice effect).

  A specific example of the effect by the effect button 35, the third decorative member 33c, and the image display device 31 in the “special reach (big hit) 1” will be described later with reference to FIG.

Sub CPU120a is, during the period of the "Special Reach (first half)" from the timing _{T 14} to time _{T 15} (a-4), in the image display device 31, the character "swordsman A" enemy character "swordsman X" Control for displaying the effect image (effect image (a-4) in FIG. 33A) is performed. As for “Special Reach”, there is a possibility that a jackpot game (special game) will be executed rather than “Super Reach” in which the character “Swordsman A” fights the enemy character “Swordsman X” (expectation for jackpot) (Degree of reliability) is a high performance.

The sub CPU120a sets the operating lifetime _{Y 11} which becomes effective pressing operation of the performance button 35 is in the "Special Reach (first half)". Operation In lifetime Y _11, so as to display the operation promoting notification image of performance button 35 for urging the operation of the performance button 35 to the player in the image display device 31 (not shown). Incidentally, the sub CPU120a, in this operation lifetime _{Y 11,} is controlled to a state as not to protrude the performance button 35 (first state).

Sub CPU120a, by the player depresses the performance button 35 during the lifetime Y ₁₁ operation, the cut-in image display period C _11, as cut-in announcement is a kind of jackpot announcement attraction, jackpot gaming (special game ) Is executed (displaying any one of a plurality of types of cut-in images having different possibilities (expected degree of reliability (reliability)).
Sub CPU120a is the cut-in image display period _{C 11,} as cut-in warning, As shown in FIG. 33A, cut-in image on the pattern extending in the longitudinal direction background character "swordsman B" appears (a-5- 1) Cut-in image (a-5-2) in which “two swords” appear on the background of the pattern extending in the horizontal direction, cut-in image in which “one sword” appears on the background of the pattern extending in the horizontal direction Control is performed to display any cut-in image in the image (a-5-3).
Note that a period (a-5-1) shown in FIG. 32A indicates a period during which a cut-in image (a-5-1) is displayed as a cut-in notice, and a period (a-5-2) indicates a cut. The period in which the cut-in image (a-5-2) is displayed as the in-notice, and the period (a-5-3) is the period in which the cut-in image (a-5-3) is displayed as the cut-in notice. while indicating, both of which have the same timing, corresponding to cut-in the image display period C _11.

  The cut-in image (a-5-1) as a cut-in notice is a cut (high reliability) that has the highest possibility of a jackpot game (special game) being executed (expectation degree (reliability) for the jackpot). As a cut-in notice, the cut-in image (a-5-2) has a medium possibility of a jackpot game (special game) being executed (expected degree of reliability (reliability)). The cut-in image (a-5-3) as a cut-in notice is a possibility of a jackpot game (special game) being executed (expected degree of jackpot (reliability)) Is the lowest (low reliability) cut-in image.

If the player in lifetime Y ₁₁ and presses the performance button 35 highly reliable cut-in image (a-5-1) is displayed operation effect, or player in lifetime Y ₁₁ operation buttons 35 without pressing operation, when the cut-in image if the pressing operation (a-5-1) is displayed, the sub CPU120a is "Special reach (second half)" from the timing _{T 15} to time _{T 16} In the period (a-6-1), in the image display device 31, in addition to the character “swordsman A”, the character “swordsman B” of the cut-in image (a-5-1) appears. However, control is performed to display an effect image (effect image (a-6-1) in FIG. 33B) that fights against the enemy character “swordsman X”.
This character “swordsman B” is a character that appears in “special reach” (swordsman B reach) in “special reach (big hit) 3-2” (reach production C) described later. It may also appear in “Special Reach” (Swordsman A Reach) of (Big Bonus) 3-1 ”(Reach Production B).
The character “swordsman B” corresponds to the “unique motif mode” described above. This “specific motif mode” is not limited to such a character, and may be any effect that appears in common in “reach effect B” and “reach effect C”, for example, image display device 31. May be displayed on the background, items such as coins or clothes, etc., the effect sound or sound effect output from the audio output device 32, and the lighting of the frame lighting device 34b An aspect may be sufficient.

On the other hand, the player is operating lifetime Y medium reliability and presses the performance button 35 in ₁₁ the cut-in image (a-5-2) or low confidence of cut-in image (a-5-3) is displayed If it is, or, the player does not presses the performance button 35 in lifetime Y ₁₁ operations, cut-in image if the pressing operation (a-5-2) or the cut-in images (a-5-3) Is displayed, the sub CPU 120a displays the image display device 31 in the period (a-6-2) (same timing as the period (a-6-1)) of the “special reach (second half)”. Subsequently to the “special reach (first half)”, control is performed to display an effect image (effect image (a-6-2) in FIG. 33B) in which only the character “swordsman A” fights the enemy character “swordsman X”.
In this way, in “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 1”, the stage of “Special Reach” (Swordsman A Reach), which is the third stage of Reach Production, has multiple cut-in notices in “Special Reach (Second Half)” (Cut-in image (a-5-1), (a-5-2), (a-5-3)), and further effect image (a-6-1) and effect of “special reach (second half)” Due to the difference such as the image (a-6-2), there are a plurality of types with different degrees of expectation that the jackpot game (special game) will be executed.

Sub CPU120a, during the period in the "Special Reach (second half)" from the timing _{T 15} to time _{T 16} (a-6-1) (or period (a-6-2)), a pressing operation of the performance button 35 setting the operating lifetime Y ₁₂ to be effective. Sub CPU120a is, in the operation lifetime Y _12, so as to display the operation promoting notification image of performance button 35 for urging the operation of the performance button 35 to the player in the image display device 31. Sub CPU120a, in operation valid period _{Y 12} previously, is controlled to a state as not to protrude the performance button 35 (first state). The sub CPU120a, when starting the operation lifetime _{Y 12,} based on the effect control information shown in FIG. 40 (e) described below, at a predetermined ratio, the performance button 35 by the drive control of the performance button the drive motor 35b Control to the protruding state (second state).

The player, in the operation lifetime _{Y 12,} when depressed the performance button 35 in a state of protruding (second state), the sub CPU120a, for example the first decorative member 33a at timing _{E 15,} image Moving from a “second standby position” (original position), which is an upper position than the display device 31, to a “second operation position” (position after the movement), which is a position on the front surface of the image display device 31; Thus, the player is notified of the fact that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot (the determination result that the jackpot game is executed) (the jackpot winning determination effect).
Incidentally, when the player has elapsed operating lifetime _{Y 12} without presses the performance button 35 during the operation lifetime _{Y 12} even sub CPU120a the timing after the lapse of the operation lifetime _{Y 12} (also At “timing E ₁₅ ”), the first decorative member 33a is controlled to move downward. The first decorative member 33a moved downward moves upward and returns to the original position by the operation control of the sub CPU 120a.

In "Special Reach (jackpot) 1", the operation lifetime _{Y 12,} although in some cases the performance button 35 and the non-protruding (first state), Again, sub CPU120a is valid operation performs control to operate the first decorative member 33a downward to timing E ₁₅ by the player during Y ₁₂ operates presses the performance button 35, or, performance button player while operating lifetime Y ₁₂ by elapsed operating lifetime Y ₁₂ without depressing operation 35 performs a control (which also. as "timing E _15") to operate the first decorative member 33a downward to.

On the other hand, in the "Special Reach (loss) 1" below, sub CPU120a is (a second state) where the operation lifetime _{Y 12} to project the performance button 35 or a a non-protruding (the first state to) or regardless, also, with or without pressing operation of the performance button 35 by the player during this operation lifetime Y _12, not operated first decorative member 33a. Accordingly, the player is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing” (the determination result that the jackpot game is not executed) (a jackpot winning determination effect).

When the effect button 35 in the protruding state (second state) is pressed down, the sub CPU 120a does not protrude from the state (second state) in which the effect button 35 protrudes (first state). Control to change to. Alternatively, the sub CPU120a is in operation lifetime _{Y 12,} in the case where the validity period _{Y 12} has passed operated by performance button 35 in a state of protruding is not pressed even the performance button 35 with the lapse of operation lifetime _{Y 12} Control is performed to change from the protruding state (second state) to the non-projecting state (first state).

  A specific example of the jackpot winning effect by the effect button 35, the first decorative member 33a, and the image display device 31 in the “special reach (big hit) 1” will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the “special reach (second half)” period (a-7) shown in FIG. 32A, the sub CPU 120a determines that the numerical value of the middle symbol is the numerical value of the temporarily stopped left symbol and right symbol in the image display device 31. By being the same, the effect image (a-7) (the effect image (a-7) in FIG. 33B) that stops in a state where the three effect symbols are aligned to the same numerical value is displayed, and the player wins the jackpot game. Informing that it has been decided to execute, if the three symbols displayed in a stopped state slightly shake, whether the winning jackpot is "4R (round) jackpot" or "16R (round) jackpot" will be promoted, To give a sense of expectation.

In the “re-lottery effect” from the timing T ₁₆ to the timing T ₁₇ , the sub CPU 120a is stopped and displayed at the same numerical value (for example, 444) in the previous “special reach (second half)” period (a-7). One production symbol is displayed in full rotation.
The sub CPU120a sets the operating lifetime _{Y 13} a press operation of the performance button 35 is effective in this "redrawing effect". Sub CPU120a is, in the operation lifetime Y _13, so as to display the operation promoting notification image of performance button 35 for urging the operation of the performance button 35 to the player in the image display device 31. Sub CPU120a, in operation valid period _{Y 13} previously, is controlled to a state as not to protrude the performance button 35 (first state). The sub CPU120a, when starting the operation lifetime Y _13, in the proportions described below, to control the state of being projected performance button 35 by the drive control of the performance button the drive motor 35b (second state).

The sub CPU 120a determines that the 4R (round) “second jackpot” is determined, and the effect symbol designation command (“E0H02H”) based on the stop special symbol data 02 or the effect symbol designation command (“E0H12H” based on the stop special symbol data 06). when receiving a ") from the main control board 110, when executing a" special reach (jackpot) 1 ", the distribution random number values 0 to 99, the operation lifetime Y ₁₃ of" redrawing effect " The effect button 35 is controlled so as not to protrude (first state) at a ratio of 90% (random number for distribution 0 to 89), and the effect button 35 at a ratio of 10% (random number for distribution 90 to 99). Is controlled to protrude (second state).
On the other hand, the sub CPU 120a determines that the “first jackpot” of 16R (round) is determined, and the effect symbol designation command (“E0H01H”) based on the stop special symbol data 01 or the effect symbol designation command based on the stop special symbol data 05 ( When “E0H11H”) is received or “third jackpot” is determined, an effect design designation command (“E0H03H”) based on stop special figure data 03 or an effect design designation command based on stop special figure data 07 ( when receiving the "E0H13H"), when executing the "Special reach (jackpot) 1", the distribution random number values 0 to 99, the operation lifetime _{Y 13} of "redrawing effect", 20% The ratio (random number for distribution 0 to 19) is controlled so as not to project the effect button 35 (first state), and the ratio of 80% (random number for distribution) 20 to 99), the effect button 35 is controlled to protrude (second state).

Then, in the “special reach (big hit) 1” that is executed when the “first jackpot” or “third jackpot” of 16R (round) is determined, the sub CPU 120a makes the operation effective period Y ₁₃ , when the presentation button 35 in the protruding state (second state) is pressed, for example, the first decorative member 33 a is placed at a position above the image display device 31 at a timing E ₁₆ shown in FIG. Operation control for moving downward, such as moving from a certain “second standby position” (original position) to a “second operation position” (position after movement), which is the position of the front surface of the image display device 31. And, by this, “16R (round) jackpot”, which is more advantageous to the player than “4R (round) jackpot”, is executed (from “4R jackpot” to “16R jackpot” "It is promoted to a) to inform the player the (promotion director).

Incidentally, the sub CPU120a, in "Special Reach (jackpot) 1" is executed when the 16R "first jackpot" of (round) or "third jackpot" is determined, the player while operating lifetime Y ₁₃ in the case where the operation lifetime _{Y 13} a performance button 35 without pressing operation has elapsed even sub CPU120a the timing after the lapse of the operation lifetime _{Y 13} (also referred to as "timing _{E 16".)} in a first Operation control for moving the decorative member 33a downward is performed.

Incidentally, the sub CPU120a, in "Special Reach (jackpot) 1" is executed when the 16R "first jackpot" of (round) or "third jackpot" is determined, the performance button 35 on the operation lifetime _{Y 13} Similarly, when a non-protruding (first state), the control to operate the first decorative member 33a to the timing E ₁₆ by the player during operation lifetime Y ₁₃ depresses the performance button 35 downward was carried out, or player in operation the effective period Y ₁₃ has elapsed without the pressing operation the performance button 35 during the operation lifetime Y ₁₃ (also referred to as "timing E _16".) in the first decoration Control to move the member 33a downward is performed.

When the effect button 35 in the protruding state (second state) is pressed down, the sub CPU 120a does not protrude from the state (second state) in which the effect button 35 protrudes (first state). Control to change to. Alternatively, the sub CPU120a is in operation lifetime _{Y 13,} even when the operating lifetime _{Y 13} has passed by performance button 35 in a state of protruding is not pressed, the performance button 35 with the lapse of operation lifetime _{Y 13} Control is performed to change from the protruding state (second state) to the non-projecting state (first state).

  Then, the sub-CPU 120a performs the “re-lottery effect” period (a-8) of “special reach (big hit) 1” to be executed when the “first big hit” or “third big hit” of 16R (round) is determined. In FIG. 33B, the same numerical value (for example, 444) previously stopped and displayed for the three effect symbols is fully rotated and stopped in a state where the same numerical value (for example, 777) different from this is aligned. By displaying the image (a-8) on the image display device 31, the player is promoted to “16R (round) jackpot” from “4R (round) jackpot” to “16R (round) jackpot”. Notify that

In this way, the sub-CPU 120a performs the “re-lottering effect” timing in the “special reach (big hit) 1” that is executed when the “first big win” or “third big hit” of 16R (round) is determined. the first decorative member 33a is operated in a downward direction at E _16.
On the other hand, the sub CPU120a is, in the "Special Reach (jackpot) 1" is executed when the "second jackpot" of 4R (round) is determined, the operation lifetime Y ₁₃ odor performance button 35 of "redrawing effect" or is projected (the second state), regardless of whether the non-projecting (the first state), in addition, the presence or absence of the depressing operation of the performance button 35 by the player during the operation lifetime Y ₁₃ Regardless, the first decorative member 33a is not operated, and even if a plurality of effect symbols 38 that are stopped and displayed with the same numerical value (for example, 444) are fully rotated, the first decorative member 33a is stopped with an effect symbol with the same different numerical value. Do not display. As a result, the sub CPU 120a informs the player that “4R (round) jackpot” is executed, that is, “4R (round) jackpot” is not promoted to “16R (round) jackpot”.

As described above, the sub CPU 120a executes “special reach (big hit) 1”, 16R (round) “first big hit” or “third big hit” which is executed when the “second big hit” of 4R (round) is determined. In any “re-lottery effect” of “special reach (big hit) 1” executed when “is determined”, the effect button 35 protrudes (set to the second state), and does not protrude ( The first state is controlled), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, in the “re-lottery effect” of “special reach (big hit) 1” that is executed when the “second jackpot” of 4R (round) is determined, the sub CPU 120a always makes the effect button 35 non-projecting (first When the “first jackpot” or “third jackpot” of 16R (round) is determined, the “re-draw lottery effect” of “special reach (big jackpot) 1” that is executed is always projected. It is also possible to perform control so that the second state is set.

  A specific example of the promotion effect by the effect button 35, the first decorative member 33a, and the image display device 31 in “special reach (big hit) 1” will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special Reach (Loose) 1)
Next, a variation effect whose variation effect type is “special reach (losing) 1” will be described.
For "Special Reach (loss) 1", sub CPU120a performs the same fluctuation effect and "Special reach (jackpot) 1" from the timing _{T 11} to time _{T 16} shown in FIG. 32 (a), the timing _{T 16} "re-change demonstration" from to the timing T ₁₇ is not executed. Further, the sub CPU 120a does not execute the above-mentioned “big hit finalizing effect” in “special reach (losing) 1”.

Further, in the "Special Reach (loss) 1", the sub CPU120a is an operation lifetime projecting the performance button 35 (the operation lifetime equivalent to Y ₁₂₎ (the second state in the jackpot Toraku decided effect described above ) Or non-protruding (the first state). However, the sub CPU 120a does not operate the first decorative member 33a regardless of whether or not the player presses the effect button 35 during the operation effective period. Accordingly, the player is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing” (the determination result that the jackpot game is not executed) (a jackpot winning determination effect).

  Further, in the “special reach (losing) 1”, the sub CPU 120a has three “special reach (second half)” as shown in the effect image (A2-1) and the effect image (A2-2) in FIG. 33B. Out of the production symbols, the middle symbol, which is the final stop symbol, is stopped and displayed without making it the same as the numerical value of the left symbol and the right symbol that were temporarily stopped first, so that the judgment result of the jackpot determination is “lost” To the player.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram showing effect control information in “special reach (losing) 1” and “special reach (big hit) 1”. The effect control information shown in FIG. 40 is a kind of information held in the variable effect pattern determination table in the sub ROM 120c. The “random number value A” to “random number value G” shown here are all random numbers for distribution ranging from 0 to 99, and are acquired by the sub CPU 120a in step S1531-2.

The production control information in FIG. 40A includes a cut-in notice execution ratio for displaying a highly reliable cut-in image (corresponding to a cut-in image (a-5-1)) in which “Swordsman B” appears, Execution ratio of cut-in notice to display medium-reliability cut-in image (corresponding to cut-in image (a-5-2)) in which “two swords” appear, and low reliability in which “one sword” appears The cut-in notice execution ratio for displaying the cut-in image (corresponding to the cut-in image (a-5-3)) is shown. The sub CPU 120a determines which cut-in notice is executed based on the acquired “random value A”.
In addition, the effect control information in FIG. 40A indicates the operation ratio and the non-operation ratio of the second decorative member 33b according to the cut-in notice. The sub CPU 120a determines, based on the acquired “random number value B”, whether to operate or deactivate the second decorative member 33b according to the cut-in notice to be executed.

In “Special Reach (Lose) 1”, a high-reliability cut-in notice of “Swordsman B” appears at a rate of 10% (random value A is 0-9), and a rate of 20% (random value) Low confidence that “one sword” appears at a ratio of 70% (random number A is 0-9) by executing a cut-in notice of medium reliability when “two swords” appear when A is 10-29) Perform a cut-in notice of the degree.
On the other hand, in “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 1”, a highly reliable cut-in notice of “Swordsman B” appears at a rate of 70% (random value A is 0 to 69), and a rate of 20% ( A medium-reliability cut-in notice is made when “two swords” appear when the random number A is 70 to 89), and “one sword” appears at a rate of 10% (random number A is 90 to 99). Perform a low-reliability cut-in notice.

In “special reach (losing) 1”, when a highly reliable cut-in notice of “swordsman B” is executed, the second decorative member 33b is set to a ratio of 70% (random number B is 0). -69), inactive at a rate of 30% (random number B is 70-99), and performing a medium-reliability cut-in notice that “two swords” appear, the second decoration The member 33b is operated at a rate of 50% (random number B is 0 to 49), is deactivated at a rate of 50% (random number B is 50 to 99), and "one sword" appears with low reliability. When the cut-in notice is executed, the second decorative member 33b is operated at a rate of 30% (random number B is 0 to 29) and is not operated at a rate of 70% (random number B is 30 to 99). To do.
On the other hand, in the case of “special reach (big hit) 1”, when executing a highly reliable cut-in notice of “swordsman B”, the second decorative member 33b is set to a ratio of 90% (random number B is 0). -89), the second decoration is used when a non-operation is performed at a rate of 10% (random number B is 90-99) and a medium-reliability cut-in notice of “two swords” appears. The member 33b is operated at a rate of 50% (random number B is 0 to 49), is deactivated at a rate of 50% (random number B is 50 to 99), and "one sword" appears with low reliability. When the cut-in notice is executed, the second decorative member 33b is operated at a rate of 10% (random number B is 0 to 9) and is not operated at a rate of 90% (random number B is 10 to 99). To do.

As described above, in both of “special reach (losing) 1” and “special reach (big hit) 1”, when the highly reliable cut-in notice is executed, the ratio of operating the second decorative member 33b is determined. When performing a cut-in notice with high reliability and low reliability, the ratio of the second decorative member 33b being inactive is set to be high.
That is, the sub CPU 120a may execute the special game in the case of executing the jackpot notice effect after operating the movable member, rather than executing the jackpot notice effect without operating the movable member. A high (high reliability) jackpot announcement effect is made easy to execute.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40A, in the “special reach (losing) 1”, the sub CPU 120a executes a highly reliable cut-in notice at a rate of 10%, and this highly reliable cut-in. When the advance notice is executed, the second decorative member 33b is operated at a rate of 70%. That is, the sub CPU 120a operates the second decorative member 33b at a rate of 7% when executing the highly reliable cut-in notice in the “special reach (loss) 1”.
On the other hand, in the case of “special reach (big hit) 1”, the sub CPU 120a executes the high-reliability cut-in notification at a rate of 70%. The decorative member 33b is operated at a rate of 90%. That is, the sub CPU 120a operates the second decorative member 33b at a rate of 63% when executing the highly reliable cut-in notice in “special reach (big hit) 1”.
That is, “special reach (big hit) 1” causes the second decorative member 33b to operate at a higher rate than “special reach (losing) 1”.
Further, as shown in FIG. 40A, in the “special reach (losing) 1”, the sub CPU 120a executes a low-reliability cut-in notice at a rate of 70%, and this low-reliability cut-in. When the advance notice is executed, the second decorative member 33b is inactive at a rate of 70%. That is, the sub CPU 120a deactivates the second decorative member 33b at a rate of 63% when executing the low-reliability cut-in notice in the “special reach (losing) 1”.
On the other hand, in the case of “special reach (big hit) 1”, the sub CPU 120a executes the low-reliability cut-in notice at a rate of 10%. The decorative member 33b is inactive at a rate of 90%. In other words, the sub CPU 120a deactivates the second decorative member 33b at a rate of 9% when executing the low-reliability cut-in notice in “special reach (big hit) 1”.
That is, “special reach (big hit) 1” makes the second decorative member 33b non-operating at a lower rate than “special reach (losing) 1”.
Thus, since the operation ratio of the second decorative member 33b is higher in the “special reach (big hit) 1” than in the “special reach (losing) 1”, the sub CPU 120a operates the second decorative member 33b. Thus, the player is notified of the possibility that the determination result of the jackpot determination will be a determination result that the jackpot game is executed (a jackpot notice effect).

The effect control information in FIG. 40 (b) indicates the operation timing ratio when the second decorative member 33b operates according to the cut-in notice. The sub CPU 120a determines, based on the acquired “random number value C”, at which timing of the timing E ₁₁ to the timing E ₁₄ to operate the second decorative member 33b according to the cut-in notice to be executed.

In the case of executing a highly reliable cut-in notice in which “swordsman B” appears in “special reach (losing) 1”, when the second decorative member 33 b is operated, a ratio of 20% (random number C is 0) -19) in is operated at the timing _{E 11,} is operated at the timing _{E 12} a rate of 10% (random number C is 20 to 29), at the timing _{E 13} ratio of 40% (random number C is 30 to 69) is operated, it is operated at the timing _{E 14} at a rate of 30% (random value C 70-99).
In the case of executing the cut-in notice of medium reliability in which “two swords” appear in “special reach (losing) 1”, when the second decorative member 33 b is operated, a ratio of 18% (random value) C is operated at the timing _{E 11} in the 0 to 17), the timing at the rate of 12% (by random number C is 18 to 29) is operated at the timing _{E 12,} the proportion of 38% (random number C is 30 to 67) is operated in E _13, it is operated at the timing _{E 14} at a rate of 32% (random number C is 68 to 99).
In addition, in the case of executing a low-reliability cut-in notice in which “one sword” appears in “special reach (losing) 1”, when the second decorative member 33b is operated, a ratio of 16% (random value) C is operated at the timing _{E 11} at 0 to 15), the timing at a rate of 14% (by random number C is 16 to 29) is operated at the timing _{E 12,} the proportion of 36% (random number C is 30 to 65) is operated in E _13, it is operated at the timing _{E 14} at a rate of 34% (random number C is 66 to 99).

On the other hand, when performing a highly reliable cut-in notice in which “swordsman B” appears in “special reach (big hit) 1”, when the second decorative member 33b is operated, a ratio of 30% (random value C There is operated at the timing _{E 11} at 0-29), is operated at the timing _{E 12} at a rate of 40% (random number C is 30 to 69), 10% of the proportion (random value C 70-79) at the timing E ₁₃ is operated, the operating timing _{E 14} at a rate of 20% (random number C is 80 to 99).
In addition, in the case of executing a medium-reliability cut-in notice in which “two swords” appear in “special reach (big hit) 1”, when the second decorative member 33b is operated, a ratio of 32% (random value) C is operated at the timing _{E 11} in the 0-29), timing at a rate of 38% (by random number C is 32 to 69) is operated at the timing _{E 12,} the proportion of 12% (random number C is 70 to 81) It is operated in E _13, at a rate of 18% (random number C is 82 to 99) operate at the timing _{E 14.}
In the case of executing a low-reliability cut-in notice in which “one sword” appears in “special reach (big hit) 1”, when the second decorative member 33b is operated, a ratio of 34% (random value) C is operated at the timing _{E 11} at 0 to 15), operated at the timing _{E 12} ratio of 36% (random number C is 34 to 69), the timing at a rate of 14% (random number C is 70 to 83) is operated in E _13, it is operated at the timing _{E 14} at a rate of 16% (random number C is 84 to 99).

As described above, in “special reach (losing) 1”, the rate of operation at the late timings E ₁₃ and E ₁₄ is high, and in “special reach (big hit) 1”, the operation is performed at the early timings E ₁₁ and E ₁₂ . The ratio is high.
Further, in the "Special Reach (loss) 1" operates at a high rate toward the timing _{E 11} than the timing _{E 12,} towards the timing _{E 13} than the timing _{E 14} is operated at a high rate. The ratio of operating at the timings E ₁₁ and E ₁₃ increases as the reliability of the cut-in notice increases, that is, as the ratio of operating the second decorative member 33b increases.
On the other hand, in “special reach (big hit) 1”, the timing E ₁₂ operates at a higher rate than the timing E ₁₁ , and the timing E ₁₄ operates at a higher rate than the timing E ₁₃ . The ratio of operating at the timings E ₁₂ and E ₁₄ is higher as the reliability of the cut-in notice is higher, that is, as the ratio of operating the second decorative member 33b is higher.
Thus, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a big hit, the rate at which the second decorative member 33b operates at an earlier timing than when the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost is high. Further, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the second decorative member 33b is placed at a timing closer to or the same as the timing of switching the effect in the image display device 31 than when the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost. Since the ratio of operation is high, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation for jackpot.

  The effect control information in FIG. 40C indicates the execution ratio and non-execution ratio of the commentary notice according to the cut-in notice. The sub CPU 120a determines whether to execute the commentary notice or not based on the acquired “random number D” in accordance with the cut-in notice to be executed.

When performing a high-reliability cut-in notice that “Swordsman B” appears in “Special Reach (Lose) 1”, an explanation notice is executed at a rate of 40% (random number D is 0 to 39), The commentary notice is not executed at a rate of 60% (random value D is 40 to 99).
In addition, when performing a medium-reliability cut-in notice in which “two swords” appear in “special reach (losing) 1”, an explanation notice is given at a rate of 50% (random number D is 0 to 49). The commentary notice is not executed at a ratio of 50% (random number D is 50 to 99).
In addition, when executing a low-reliability cut-in notice that “one sword” appears in “Special Reach (Lose) 1”, an explanation notice is given at a rate of 60% (random number D is 0 to 59). The commentary notice is not executed at a rate of 40% (random value D is 60 to 99).

On the other hand, when performing a highly reliable cut-in advance notice of “Swordsman B” in “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 1”, an explanation notice is executed at a rate of 20% (random number D is 0 to 19) The commentary notice is not executed at a rate of 80% (random number D is 20 to 99).
In addition, in the case of executing a cut-in notice of medium reliability in which “two swords” appear in “special reach (big hit) 1”, an explanation notice is given at a rate of 30% (random number D is 0 to 29). The commentary notice is not executed at a ratio of 70% (random number D is 30 to 99).
In addition, when executing a low-reliability cut-in notice that “one sword” appears in “special reach (big hit) 1”, an explanation notice is given at a rate of 40% (random number D is 0 to 39). The commentary notice is not executed at a rate of 60% (random value D is 40 to 99).

As described above, in both of “special reach (losing) 1” and “special reach (big hit) 1”, a case where a highly reliable cut-in notice is executed, that is, the second decorative member 33b is operated at a high rate. In contrast, when the low-reliability cut-in notice is executed, that is, when the second decorative member 33b is deactivated at a high rate, the explanation notice is executed at a higher rate.
That is, when the sub CPU 120a is determined to execute the jackpot game, the sub CPU 120a does not operate the second decoration member 33b as compared with the case where the jackpot notice effect is performed after the second decoration member 33b is operated as the movable member. When the jackpot notice effect is executed, the jackpot notice effect is easily executed at a high rate.

  The effect control information in FIG. 40 (d) indicates the execution ratio of the jackpot finalizing effect according to the cut-in notice. The sub CPU 120a determines whether to execute the jackpot finalizing effect according to the cut-in notice to be executed, based on the acquired “random value E”. Note that, as shown in FIG. 40 (d), in the “special reach (losing) 1”, the jackpot finalizing effect is not executed.

When performing a highly reliable cut-in notice that “Swordsman B” appears in “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 1”, the jackpot finalizing effect is executed at a rate of 25% (random number E is 0 to 24). The jackpot finalizing effect is not executed at a ratio of 75% (random value E is 25 to 99).
In addition, in the case of executing a medium-reliability cut-in notice in which “two swords” appear in “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 1”, the jackpot confirmation effect at a rate of 10% (random number E is 0 to 9) And the jackpot finalizing effect is not executed at a ratio of 90% (random value E is 10 to 99).
In addition, when performing a low-reliability cut-in notice that “one sword” appears in “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 1”, the jackpot confirmation effect at a rate of 5% (random number E is 0 to 4) And the jackpot finalizing effect is not executed at a ratio of 95% (random value E is 5 to 99).

As described above, in the case of “special reach (big hit) 1”, a cut-in notification with a high degree of reliability is performed as compared with a case where a cut-in notification with a low degree of reliability is executed, that is, when the second decorative member 33b is deactivated at a high rate. In other words, when the second decorative member 33b is operated at a higher rate, the jackpot finalizing effect is executed at a higher rate.
In other words, when the sub CPU 120a executes the jackpot finalizing effect (special game finalizing effect), the sub CPU 120a operates the second decorative member 33b as compared with the case of executing the jackpot finalizing effect without operating the second decorative member 33b. When the jackpot finalizing effect is executed, the jackpot finalizing effect is executed at a higher rate.

Further, the effect control information in FIG. 40 (d) indicates the execution timing ratio of the jackpot finalizing effect according to the cut-in notice. In accordance with the cut-in notice to be executed, the sub CPU 120a executes the jackpot finalizing effect at any of the timings P ₁₁ and P ₁₂ before the start of the special reach and the timings P ₁₃ and P ₁₄ after the start of the special reach. Is determined by the obtained “random number F”.

In the case of performing a cut-in notice in which “Swordsman B” appears in “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 1”, the timing before the start of Special Reach at a ratio of 40% (Random Value F is 0 to 39). run the P _11, the proportion of 30% (random value F is 40-69) executed special reach before the start timing _{P 12,} the special reach after the start at a rate of 20% (random value F is 70 to 89) run of the timing _{P 13,} a rate of 10% (random value F is 90 to 99) to execute the timing _{P 14} after special reach start with.
In addition, in the case of executing a cut-in notice of medium reliability in which “two swords” appear in “special reach (big hit) 1”, the jackpot finalizing effect is a ratio of 25% (random number F is 0 to 24). in running the timing _{P 11} before the special reach the start, 25% of (random value F is 25 to 49) running in the special reach before the start timing _{P 12,} the 50 25% proportion (random value F 74) run the timing _{P 13} after Special reach the start, the ratio of 25% (random value F is executed in the timing _{P 14} after Special reach starts at 75 to 99).
In addition, in the case of executing a low-reliability cut-in notice that “one sword” appears in “special reach (big hit) 1”, the jackpot finalizing effect is a ratio of 10% (random number F is 0 to 9). in running the timing _{P 11} before the special reach the start, the ratio of 20% (random value F is 10 to 29) running in the special reach before the start timing _{P 12,} the 30 and 30% of the proportion (random value F 59) run the timing _{P 13} after Special reach the start, the ratio of 40% (random value F is executed in the timing _{P 14} after Special reach starts at 60 to 99).

  In this way, when the highly reliable cut-in notice is executed in “special reach (big hit) 1”, that is, when the second decorative member 33b is operated at a high rate, the low-reliability cut-in notice is executed. In this case, that is, when the second decorative member 33b is deactivated at a high rate, the jackpot finalizing effect is set to be executed more easily at a later timing after the start of the special reach. When the second decorative member 33b is inactive, it is possible to give a big surprise to the player by executing the jackpot finalizing effect at a late timing. Moreover, when the 2nd decoration member 33b operate | moves, a player can be reassured early by performing a jackpot finalization effect at an early timing.

  The effect control information in FIG. 40 (e) projects the effect button 35 that controls the effect button 35 to the state in which the effect button 35 in the jackpot winning decision effect is protruded (second state) according to the cut-in notice. The execution ratio of the effect controlled to the state (first state) that is not performed is shown. In accordance with the cut-in notice to be executed, the sub CPU 120a controls the effect button 35 to be in a protruding state (second state) or does not protrude the effect button 35 (first state) in the jackpot winning determination effect. Is determined by the obtained “random value G”.

In the case of performing a highly reliable cut-in notice in which “Swordsman B” appears in “Special Reach (Lossing) 1”, the ratio of 20% (Random value G is 0 to 19) in the jackpot winning effect. The effect button 35 is controlled to protrude (second state), and the effect button 35 is controlled to a state where the effect button 35 does not protrude (first state) at a ratio of 80% (random number G is 20 to 99).
In addition, when a medium-reliability cut-in notice in which “two swords” appear in “special reach (losing) 1”, a ratio of 15% (random value G is 0 to 0) 14), the effect button 35 is controlled to be protruded (second state), and the effect button 35 is controlled to be not protruded (first state) at a ratio of 85% (random number G is 15 to 99). .
In addition, in the case of executing a low-reliability cut-in notice in which “one sword” appears in “special reach (losing) 1”, a ratio of 10% (random value G is 0 to 0) in the jackpot winning decision effect. In 9), the effect button 35 is controlled to be protruded (second state), and the effect button 35 is controlled to be not protruded (first state) at a ratio of 90% (random number G is 10 to 99). .

On the other hand, when a highly reliable cut-in notice in which “swordsman B” appears in “special reach (bonus) 1” is executed, a ratio of 90% (random value G is 0 to 89) in the jackpot winning decision effect. ), The effect button 35 is controlled to be protruded (second state), and the effect button 35 is controlled to be not protruded (first state) at a rate of 10% (random number G is 90 to 99).
In addition, when a medium-reliability cut-in notice in which “two swords” appear in “special reach (big hit) 1”, a ratio of 85% (random value G is 0 to 0) in the jackpot winning decision effect. 84), the effect button 35 is controlled to be protruded (second state), and the effect button 35 is controlled to be not protruded (first state) at a ratio of 5% (random number G is 85 to 99). .
In addition, when executing a low-reliability cut-in notice in which “one sword” appears in “special reach (big hit) 1”, a ratio of 80% (random value G is 0 to 0) in the jackpot winning decision effect. 79), the effect button 35 is controlled to protrude (second state), and the effect button 35 is controlled not to protrude (first state) at a rate of 20% (random value G is 80 to 99). .

  In this way, when “special reach (big hit) 1” executes a low-reliability cut-in advance notice and “medium-reliability cut-in notice” than “special reach (losing) 1”, In any case where the highly reliable cut-in notice is executed, the effect button 35 is controlled to protrude (second state) in the jackpot winning decision effect at a higher rate. Therefore, the effect of controlling the effect button 35 to the protruding state (second state) informs the player that the jackpot determination result may be a determination result that the jackpot game is executed, and the jackpot determination result It is a production that gives a sense of expectation that is a big hit.

  Further, in both of “special reach (losing) 1” and “special reach (big hit) 1”, a case where a low-reliability cut-in notice is executed, that is, a case where the second decorative member 33b is deactivated at a high rate. Rather than when the highly reliable cut-in notice is executed, that is, when the second decorative member 33b is operated at a higher rate, the effect button 35 is projected in the jackpot winning effect at a higher rate (second Control). Thereby, the player can have a sense of expectation that the effect button 35 may protrude when the second decorative member 33b operates.

Next, another variation effect example shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B will be briefly described.
(Special reach 2)
In “special reach (big hit) 2”, the sub CPU 120a determines that “swordsman A” is “special reach” as shown in the effect image (a-6-1) or effect image (a-6-2) in FIG. 33B. After executing the “Swordsman A Reach” that appears, an effect image (A2-1) that notifies “losing” as a determination result of the jackpot determination is displayed. Subsequently, the sub CPU 120a causes, for example, a scroll to appear. After displaying the effect image (A2-3) and then displaying the above-mentioned effect image (a-7), whether or not to promote the round after notifying “hit” as the determination result of the jackpot determination by the revival effect The above-mentioned effect image (a-8) is displayed in the re-lottery effect of the contents to notify that the round has been promoted.

(Super reach 1)
In “super reach (big hit) 1”, as shown in FIG. 33A, the sub CPU 120a displays the effect image (A1-1) after executing the super reach (M child reach) for displaying the effect image (a-3). Displayed to notify that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot. The sub CPU 120a does not operate the second decorative member 33b in the “super reach (big hit) 1”.

(Super Reach 1)
In “super reach (losing) 1”, as shown in FIG. 33A, the sub CPU 120a performs the effect image (A1-2) and the effect image (A1-2) after executing the super reach (M child reach) for displaying the effect image (a-3). As shown in the effect image (A1-3), the middle symbol, which is the final stop symbol among the three effect symbols, is stopped and displayed without making it the same as the numerical value of the left symbol and the right symbol temporarily stopped. The player is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. In this “super reach (losing) 1”, the sub CPU 120a does not operate the second decorative member 33b.

(Super reach (4th big hit or small hit))
In “super reach (fourth big hit or small hit)”, as shown in FIG. 33A, after execution of super reach (M child reach) displaying the effect image (a-3), the effect image (A1-2) Later, special effects are performed to change the middle symbol. In this special effect, for example, after performing a special effect that gives a sense of expectation, such as an effect image (A1-4), the final image (A1) As shown in -5), the medium symbol is changed to, for example, a small symbol that is written “Breakdown”, and is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player is informed that the player has won a specific hit (the fourth big hit or the small hit). In this “super reach (fourth big hit or small hit) 1”, the second decorative member 33b does not operate.

(Special reach (big hit) 3-1)
Next, the variation effect whose variation effect type is “special reach (big hit) 3-1” will be described. FIG. 32B is a diagram for explaining the temporal flow of the effect control of the fluctuation effect of “special reach (big hit) 3-1”.
As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the contents of the performance from the timing T ₂₁ to the timing T _{26 of} “special reach (big hit) 3-1” are “special reach” except that the combination of the design symbols differs depending on the type of jackpot. it is similar to the effect details of the timing _{T 11} of (jackpot) 1 "to the timing _{T 16.}
That is, as shown in FIG. 32B, timings T _{21 to} T ₂₆ correspond to timings T _{11 to} T ₁₆ . Timings E _{21 to} E ₂₅ correspond to timings E _{11 to} E ₁₅ . Timings P _{21 to} P ₂₄ correspond to timings P _{11 to} P ₁₄ . The timing _{R 2} corresponds to the timing _{R 1.} Timing E ₂₆ corresponds to timing E ₁₇ .
The period (b-1) corresponds to the period (a-1). The period (b-2) corresponds to the period (a-2). The period (b-3) corresponds to the period (a-3). The period (b-4) corresponds to the period (a-4). Periods (b-5-1), (b-5-2), and (b-5-3) are periods (a-5-1), (a-5-2), and (a-5-3) It corresponds to. The periods (b-6-1) and (b-6-2) correspond to the periods (a-6-1) and (a-6-2). The period (b-7) corresponds to the period (a-7).
The operation effective period Y ₂₁ corresponds to the operation effective period Y ₁₁ , and the operation effective period Y ₂₂ corresponds to the operation effective period Y ₁₂ .
And as can be seen from FIG. 33A and FIG. 34A, FIG. 33B and FIG. 34B, the effect images from timing T ₂₁ to timing T _{26 of} “special reach (big hit) 3-1” except that the combinations of the effect symbols are different. the contents are the same as those of the effect image content from the timing T ₁₁ of the "Special reach (jackpot) 1" until the timing T _16. That is, effect images (b-1) to (b-4) correspond to effect images (a-1) to (a-4), and cut-in images (b-5-1) to (b-5-5). 3) corresponds to the cut-in images (a-5-1) to (a-5-3), and the effect images (b-6-1) and (b-6-2) are the effect images (a- 6-1) and (a-6-2), and the effect image (b-7) corresponds to the effect image (a-7).
In addition, in “special reach (losing) 1” of the lost production corresponding to this special reach (big hit) 3-1, as shown in FIG. And the effect image (B-1) which stops without being the same as the right design is displayed.

(Special reach (big hit) 3-2)
Next, a description will be given of a variation effect whose variation effect type is “special reach (big hit) 3-2”. FIG. 32C is a diagram for explaining the temporal flow of the effect control of the fluctuation effect of “special reach (big hit) 3-2”.
As shown in FIG. 32C, the sub CPU 120a executes “normal fluctuation” in a period (c−1) from timing T _{31 to} T ₃₂ . The sub CPU120a is "normal reach" in the period from the timing _{T 32} to time _{T 33} (c-2), from the timing _{T 33} to time _{T 34} "Special Reach (first half)", from the timing _{T 34} to time _{T 35} “Special reach (second half)”, and from timing T ₃₅ to timing T ₃₆ , “re-lottery effect” is executed.

Sub CPU120a is the "normal variation" in the period from the timing _{T 31} to time _{T 32} (c-1), an effect image (c-1) for variably displaying a plurality of performance symbol 38 shown in FIG. 35A the image display device The control to display on 31 is performed.

The sub CPU120a is the "normal reach" (the first stage reach demonstration of) in the period from the timing _{T 32} to time _{T 33} (c-2), in the image display device 31, the two symbols (left symbol of performance symbols And the right design) are stopped and displayed in the reach mode having the same numerical value (for example, 4), and the effect image of the reach effect (the effect image (FIG. 35A) of FIG. c-2)) is displayed.

The “special reach (big hit) 3-2” includes a case where the second decorative member 33b, which is a movable member, operates and a case where the second decorative member 33b does not operate.
When the second decorative member 33b operates, an operation of moving from the “first standby position” to the “first operation position” is performed as described above. By such an operation of the second decoration member 33b, the possibility of the determination result of the jackpot determination being a determination result that the jackpot game is executed is notified (a jackpot notice effect).

The sub CPU 120a determines whether to operate or deactivate the second decorative member 33b based on the effect control information shown in FIG. 41A (a-2) described later. When operating the second decorative member 33b, the sub CPU 120a operates at the timing of any of the timings E _{31 to} E ₃₄ before the start of “special reach” (third stage reach production) described later. The “first standby position” is moved to the “first operation position”. The sub CPU 120a determines at which timing of the timings E _{31 to} E ₃₄ to operate the second decorative member 33b based on the effect control information shown in FIG. 41A (b-2) described later.
The timing of the second decorative member 33b is operated is not limited to this timing E ₃₁ to E _34, may be any timing as long as before "special reach".

Timing _{E 31, E 33,} respectively, by the player during operation lifetime _{Y 34, Y 35} to the pressing operation of the performance button 35 becomes effective presses the performance button 35, or the operation lifetime _{Y 34,} depressing operation of the performance button 35 into Y ₃₅ is a timing which the second decorative member 33b is operated by the at operating lifetime _{Y 34, Y 35} has elapsed without. On the other hand, the timings E ₃₁ and E ₃₃ are timings at which the second decorative member 33b operates regardless of the pressing operation of the effect button 35.
Sub CPU120a, if you set the That operation lifetime _{Y 34} To select timing _{E 31,} or, when setting the That operation lifetime _{Y 35} when determining the timing _{E 33,} performance button 35 in the image display device 31 Control is performed to display the operation promotion notification image. The sub CPU 120a controls the effect button 35 so as not to protrude (first state) in the operation effective periods Y ₃₄ and Y ₃₅ .

Sub CPU120a is, to set the operating lifetime _{Y 34,} the player while operating lifetime _{Y 34} operates presses the performance button 35, a second decorative member 33b at the timing _{E 31} shown in FIG. 32 (b) e.g. Make it work. Alternatively, the sub CPU120a, when without been depressed the performance button 35 during the operation lifetime _{Y 34} is operated lifetime _{Y 34} elapses, to operate the second decorative member 33b (after the operation lifetime _{Y 34} passed operation timing also the _{E 31).}
Further, when the operation effective period Y ₃₅ is set, the sub CPU 120a, for example, when the player presses down the effect button 35 during the operation effective period Y ₃₅ , for example, at the timing E ₃₃ shown in FIG. 33b is operated. Alternatively, the sub CPU120a, when operating lifetime _{Y 35} without being depressed is performance button 35 during the operation lifetime _{Y 35} has elapsed, operates the second decorative member 33b (after the operation lifetime _{Y 35} passed operation timing also the _{E 33).}

Even when the sub CPU 120a determines to deactivate the second decorative member 33b based on FIG. 41A (a-2) described later, the operation effective period Y ₃₄ and the operation effective period Y ₃₅ are described above. In this case, even if the player depresses the effect button 35 during the operation effective period Y ₃₄ and the operation effective period Y ₃₅ , the second decorative member 33b operates. do not do.

Alternatively, when the timing E ₃₂ or the timing E ₃₄ is selected, the sub CPU 120a operates the second decorative member 33b at the timing E ₃₂ or the timing E ₃₄ regardless of the pressing operation of the effect button 35.

Sub CPU120a, in _{R 3} in the "normal reach" period (c-2), the determination result that on the basis of the presentation control information shown in FIG. 41B (c-2) described below, jackpot determination result to execute the jackpot gaming The jackpot notice effect that gives a notice that the jackpot game is to be executed, that is, the possibility of being a judgment result that the jackpot game is executed, is notified, and the jackpot notice effect that gives an expectation that the judgment result of the jackpot is a jackpot is executed. Jackpot announcement attraction that is executed at this timing R _3, for example, a commentary notice such to explain the effect contents of the next "Special reach" advance, possibly jackpot gaming (special game) is executed by the notice content ( Expectations for jackpot (reliability)) are set differently. This commentary notice is also a “reach notice” which suggests to the player that the “normal reach” will develop to the “special reach”.

In this “special reach (big hit) 3-2”, the sub CPU 120a notifies that the jackpot determination result is determined to be a big win based on the effect control information shown in FIG. 41B (d-2) described later. The “big hit finalizing effect” is executed. For example, the “big hit finalizing effect” is to output a predetermined sound effect from the audio output device 32 and turn on the LED or the like of the panel lighting device 34a. When the sub CPU 120a executes such “big hit finalizing effect”, based on the effect control information shown in FIG. 41B (d-2) described later, timings P _{31 to} P ₃₄ shown in FIG. It is determined at which timing of the above.
Note that the execution timing of the “big hit finalizing effect” is not limited to the timing timings P _{31 to} P ₃₄ shown in FIG.

Further, in the “special reach (big hit) 3-2”, the sub CPU 120a executes “normal reach” in the period (c-2) as the first effect and then performs the period (c-3) to the period as the second effect. The “special reach” of (a-6) is executed. The sub CPU 120a moves the third decorative member 33c from the “third standby position” to the “third operation position” as described above before the execution of the “special reach”.
Specifically, the sub CPU120a, in variation effect of "Special Reach (jackpot) 3-2", the timing _{E 37} of the second half of the "normal reach", "the third decorative member 33c from the" third standby position " By moving to the “3rd operation position”, the game will shift from “normal reach” as “first effect” to “special reach” as “second effect” different from “first effect”. Inform the person.

Sub CPU120a, in variation effect of "Special Reach (jackpot) 3-2" are set so as to always operate the third decorative member 33c at the timing _{E 37.}
Incidentally, the sub CPU120a at timing _{E 37,} may set the third decorative member 33c to operate at a predetermined rate. For example, in the “special reach (losing) 2”, which will be described later, the sub CPU 120a sets the third decorative member 33c at a rate of 40% (the random number for distribution 0 to 39) with the random number for distribution 0 to 99. Operate, and inactivate at a rate of 60% (random number for distribution 40 to 99), and in “special reach (big hit) 3-2”, the third decorative member 33c is set according to the random number for distribution 0 to 99. 80% (distribution random number values 0 to 79), and 20% (distribution random values 80 to 99).
In this way, the sub CPU 120a sets the operation ratio so that the “special reach (big hit) 3-2” operates the third decoration member 33c at a higher ratio than the “special reach (losing) 2”. Therefore, the possibility of the determination result that the jackpot determination result is to execute the jackpot game is notified by the operation of the third decorative member 33c (a jackpot notice effect).

As shown in FIG. 32 (c), the sub CPU 120 a performs “special reach” from timing T ₃₃ to timing T ₃₄ in “special reach (big hit) 3-2” in “special reach” (third stage reach). (First half) "during the period (c-3) in the image display device 31, the effect image (character effect image (c-3) of FIG. 35A) in which the character" swordsman B "fights the enemy character" swordsman X " Control to display. As for “Special Reach”, there is a possibility that a jackpot game (special game) will be executed rather than “Super Reach” such that the character “Swordsman B” fights against the enemy character “Swordsman X” (expectation to the jackpot) (Degree of reliability) is a high performance. In “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-2”, “Super Reach” is not executed after “Normal Reach” (first stage reach production), but “Super Reach” (second stage reach production). The player can be surprised by executing “special reach” (the third stage reach) that has a higher expectation of jackpot.

Sub CPU120a sets the operating lifetime _{Y 31} a press operation is effective in performance button 35 in a "Special Reach (first half)". Operation In lifetime Y _31, so as to display the operation promoting notification image of performance button 35 for urging the operation of the performance button 35 to the player in the image display device 31 (not shown). Incidentally, the sub CPU120a, in this operation lifetime _{Y 31,} is controlled to a state as not to protrude the performance button 35 (first state).

Sub CPU120a, by the player depresses the performance button 35 during the lifetime Y ₃₁ operation, the cut-in image display period C _31, as cut-in announcement is a kind of jackpot announcement attraction, jackpot gaming (special game ) Is executed (displaying any one of a plurality of types of cut-in images having different possibilities (expected degree of reliability (reliability)).
Sub CPU120a is the cut-in image display period _{C 31,} as cut-in warning, As shown in FIG. 35A, cut-in image on the pattern extending in the longitudinal direction background character "swordsman A" appears (c-4- 1) Cut-in image (c-4-2) in which “two shurikens” appear on the background of the pattern extending in the horizontal direction, cut-in image in which “one shuriken” appears on the background of the pattern extending in the horizontal direction Control to display any cut-in image of the image (c-4-3) is performed.
A period (c-4-1) shown in FIG. 32 (c) indicates a period during which the cut-in image (c-4-1) is displayed as a cut-in notice, and a period (c-4-2) indicates the cut. The period during which the cut-in image (c-4-2) is displayed as the in-notice, and the period (c-4-3) is the period during which the cut-in image (c-4-3) is displayed as the cut-in notice. while indicating, both of which have the same timing, corresponding to cut-in the image display period C _31.

  The cut-in image (c-4-1) as the cut-in notice is a highly reliable cut-in image with the possibility that the jackpot game (special game) is executed (expectation degree (reliability) to the jackpot). The cut-in image (c-4-2) as the cut-in notice is a cut-in image having a medium reliability with respect to the jackpot, and the cut-in image (c-4-3) as the cut-in notice. Is a cut-in image with low reliability for the jackpot.

If the player in the effective period Y ₃₁ and presses the performance button 35 highly reliable cut-in image (c-4-1) is displayed operation effect, or the player in the effective period Y ₃₁ operation buttons 35 without pressing operation, when the cut-in image if the pressing operation (c-4-1) is displayed, the sub CPU120a is "Special reach (second half)" from the timing _{T 34} to time _{T 35} During the period (a-5-1), in the image display device 31, in addition to the character “Swordsman B”, the character “Swordsman B” of the cut-in image (c-4-1) appears. However, it performs control to display an effect image (effect image (a-5-1) in FIG. 35B) for fighting the enemy character “swordsman X”.
This character “swordsman A” corresponds to the above-mentioned “unique motif mode”. That is, the character “swordsman A” is a character that appears in “special reach” (swordsman A reach) in “special reach (big hit) 3-1” (reach production B). May also appear in "Special Reach" (Swordsman B Reach) of "Big Bonus" 3-2 "(Reach Production C).

On the other hand, the player is operating lifetime cut-in image of the medium reliability and presses the performance button 35 in Y ₃₁ (c-4-2) or low confidence of cut-in image (c-4-3) is displayed If it is, or, the player does not presses the performance button 35 in the effective period Y ₃₁ operations, cut-in image if the pressing operation (c-4-2) or the cut-in image (c-4-3) Is displayed, the sub CPU 120a displays the image display device 31 in the period (a-5-2) (same timing as the period (a-5-1)) of the “special reach (second half)”. Subsequently to the “special reach (first half)”, control is performed to display an effect image (effect image (a-5-2) in FIG. 35B) in which only the character “swordsman B” fights the enemy character “swordsman X”.
In this way, in “Special Reach (Large Bonus) 3-2”, the stage of “Special Reach” (Swordsman B Reach), which is the third stage of Reach Production, has multiple types of cuts in “Special Reach (Second Half)” In advance notice (cut-in images (c-4-1), (c-4-2), (c-4-3)), and also a special image (second half) effect image (c-5-1) And the effect image (c-5-2) are different from each other, so that the degree of expectation that the jackpot game (special game) is executed is different.

Sub CPU120a is in "Special Reach (second half)" from the timing _{T 34} to time _{T 35} period in the (c-5-1) (or period (c-5-2)), a pressing operation of the performance button 35 setting the operating lifetime Y ₃₂ to be effective. Sub CPU120a is, in the operation lifetime Y _32, so as to display the operation promoting notification image of performance button 35 for urging the operation of the performance button 35 to the player in the image display device 31. Sub CPU120a, in operation valid period _{Y 32} previously, is controlled to a state as not to protrude the performance button 35 (first state). The sub CPU120a, when starting the operation lifetime _{Y 32,} based on the effect control information shown in later-described FIG. 41B (e-2), in a predetermined ratio, performance button by the drive control of the performance button the drive motor 35b 35 is controlled to protrude (second state).
The sub CPU120a is player, in this operation lifetime _{Y 32,} is operated pressing the performance button 35, for example, a first decorative member 33a at timing _{E 35,} an upper position than the image display apparatus 31 " Operation control is performed to move downward, such as moving from the “second standby position” (original position) to the “second operation position” (position after movement), which is the position of the front surface of the image display device 31. Thus, the player is notified that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot (the determination result that the jackpot game is executed) (a jackpot winning decision effect). Operation contents of the first decorative member 33a at the timing _{E 35} is the same as the operation content of the first decorative member 33a at the timing _{E 15.}

Incidentally, when the operation lifetime _{Y 32} without presses the performance button 35 player while operating lifetime _{Y 32} has passed even sub CPU120a the timing after the lapse of the operation lifetime _{Y 32} (also At “timing E ₃₅ ”), the operation control for moving the first decorative member 33a downward is performed.

In "Special Reach (jackpot) 3-2", the same applies to the case of the non-projecting the performance button 35 on the operation lifetime Y ₃₂ (first state), directing the player while operating lifetime Y ₃₂ button 35 performs control to operate the first decorative member 33a downward to timing E ₃₅ by pressing operation, or the operation lifetime Y without presses the performance button 35 player while operating lifetime Y _{32 When 32} has elapsed (this is also referred to as “timing E ₃₅ ”), the first decorative member 33 a is controlled to move downward.

On the other hand, in the "Special Reach (losing) 2" described later, the sub CPU120a is (a second state) where the operation lifetime _{Y 32} to project the performance button 35 or a a non-protruding (the first state to) or regardless, not operated first decorative member 33a even the player has depressed the performance button 35 during this operation lifetime Y _32. Accordingly, the player is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing” (the determination result that the jackpot game is not executed) (a jackpot winning determination effect).

When the effect button 35 in the protruding state (second state) is pressed down, the sub CPU 120a does not protrude from the state (second state) in which the effect button 35 protrudes (first state). Control to change to. Alternatively, the sub CPU120a is in operation lifetime _{Y 32,} even when the operating lifetime _{Y 32} has passed by performance button 35 in a state of protruding is not pressed, the performance button 35 with the lapse of operation lifetime _{Y 32} Control is performed to change from the protruding state (second state) to the non-projecting state (first state).

  In the “special reach (second half)” period (c-6) shown in FIG. 32C, the sub CPU 120a determines that the numerical value of the middle symbol is the numerical value of the temporarily stopped left symbol and right symbol in the image display device 31. By being the same, the effect image (c-6) that stops in a state where the three effect symbols are aligned to the same numerical value (the effect image (c-6) of FIG. 35B) is displayed, and the player is given a jackpot game. Informing that it has been decided to execute, if the three symbols displayed in a stopped state slightly shake, whether the winning jackpot is "4R (round) jackpot" or "16R (round) jackpot" will be promoted, To give a sense of expectation.

In the “re-lottery effect” from the timing T ₃₅ to the timing T ₃₆ , the sub CPU 120a is stopped and displayed at the same numerical value (for example, 444) in the previous “special reach (second half)” period (c-6). One production symbol is displayed in full rotation.
The sub CPU120a sets the operating lifetime _{Y 33} a press operation of the performance button 35 is effective in this "redrawing effect". Sub CPU120a is, in the operation lifetime Y _33, so as to display the operation promoting notification image of performance button 35 for urging the operation of the performance button 35 to the player in the image display device 31. Sub CPU120a, prior operating lifetime _{Y 33} is controlled to a state as not to protrude the performance button 35 (first state). The sub CPU120a, when starting the operation lifetime Y _33, in the proportions described below, to control the state of being projected performance button 35 by the drive control of the performance button the drive motor 35b (second state).

The sub CPU 120a determines that the 4R (round) “second jackpot” is determined, and the effect symbol designation command (“E0H02H”) based on the stop special symbol data 02 or the effect symbol designation command (“E0H12H” based on the stop special symbol data 06). when receiving a ") from the main control board 110," when performing special reach (jackpot) 3-2 ", the distribution random number values 0 to 99, the operation lifetime Y ₃₃ of" redrawing effect " , The effect button 35 is controlled so as not to protrude (first state) at a rate of 80% (random number for distribution 0 to 79), and is rendered at a rate of 20% (random number for distribution 80 to 99). The button 35 is controlled to protrude (second state).
On the other hand, the sub CPU 120a determines that the “first jackpot” of 16R (round) is determined, and the effect symbol designation command (“E0H01H”) based on the stop special symbol data 01 or the effect symbol designation command based on the stop special symbol data 05 ( When “E0H11H”) is received or “third jackpot” is determined, an effect design designation command (“E0H03H”) based on stop special figure data 03 or an effect design designation command based on stop special figure data 07 ( When “E0H13H”) is received, when “special reach (big hit) 3-2” is executed, the random number value for distribution 0 to 99 is used in the operation effective period Y ₃₃ of “re-lottery effect”. The ratio is controlled so that the effect button 35 does not protrude (first state) at a percentage (random number for distribution 0 to 9), and a ratio of 90% (random number for distribution) The effect button 35 is controlled to protrude from the value 10 to 99) (second state).

Then, the sub-CPU 120a determines that the player makes this operation effective in the “special reach (big hit) 3-2” executed when the “first jackpot” or “third jackpot” of 16R (round) is determined. during interval _{Y 33,} when depressed the performance button 35 in a state of protruding (second state), for example, Figure 32 upper than the image display device 31 of the first decorative member 33a at the timing _{E 36} shown in (c) An operation of moving downward, such as moving from the “second standby position” (original position), which is the position, to the “second operation position” (position after the movement), which is the position on the front surface of the image display device 31 Control is performed, so that “16R (round) jackpot”, which is more advantageous to the player than “4R (round) jackpot”, is executed (from “4R jackpot” to “16R jackpot”). To be promoted) in or "to inform the player (promoted director).

Incidentally, performance button in the "Special Reach (jackpot) 3-2" to take if 16R "first jackpot" of (round) or "third jackpot" is determined, the player while operating lifetime Y ₃₃ Even when the operation effective period Y ₃₃ has elapsed without pressing 35, the sub CPU 120a performs the first decorative member at a timing after the operation effective period Y ₃₃ has elapsed (also referred to as “timing E ₃₆ ”). Operation control for moving 33a downward is performed.

Sub CPU120a performs when the 16R "first jackpot" of (round) or "third jackpot" is determined in the "Special Reach (jackpot) 3-2", the performance button 35 on the operation lifetime _{Y 33} Similarly, when a non-protruding (first state), the control to operate the first decorative member 33a downward to timing E ₃₆ by the player during operation lifetime Y ₃₃ depresses the performance button 35 was carried out, or player in operation the effective period Y ₃₃ has elapsed without the pressing operation the performance button 35 during the operation lifetime Y ₃₃ (also referred to as "timing E _36".) in the first decoration Control to move the member 33a downward is performed.

When the effect button 35 in the protruding state (second state) is pressed down, the sub CPU 120a does not protrude from the state (second state) in which the effect button 35 protrudes (first state). Control to change to. Alternatively, the sub CPU120a is in operation lifetime _{Y 33,} even when the validity period _{Y 33} has passed operated by performance button 35 in a state of protruding is not pressed, the performance button 35 with the lapse of operation lifetime _{Y 33} Control is performed to change from the protruding state (second state) to the non-projecting state (first state).

  Then, the sub-CPU 120a performs the “re-lottery effect” period (c) of “special reach (big hit) 3-2” executed when the “first big hit” or “third big hit” of 16R (round) is determined. -7) In FIG. 33B, the same numerical value (for example, 444) previously stopped and displayed for the three effect symbols is fully rotated and stopped in a state where the same numerical value (for example, 777) different from this is aligned. The effect image (c-7) is displayed on the image display device 31 to indicate that “16R (round) jackpot” is executed by the player, that is, from “4R (round) jackpot” to “16R (round) jackpot”. Notify that you have been promoted to

In this way, the sub-CPU 120a performs “re-lottery effect” in the “special reach (big hit) 3-2” executed when the “first jackpot” or “third jackpot” of 16R (round) is determined. in timing _{E 36} operating the first decorative member 33a downward.
On the other hand, the sub CPU120a the operation lifetime _{Y 33} odor performance button of the "Special Reach (jackpot) 3-2" to run when the "second jackpot" is determined, "redrawing effect" of 4R (round) projecting the 35 (a second state), or whether a non-protruding (the first state), also the depressing operation of the performance button 35 by the player during the operation lifetime Y ₃₃ Regardless of the presence or absence, the first decorative member 33a is not operated, and even if the plurality of effect symbols 38 stopped and displayed with the same numerical value (for example, 444) are fully rotated, the effect symbol with the same numerical value different from this Do not stop display with. As a result, the sub CPU 120a informs the player that “4R (round) jackpot” is executed, that is, “4R (round) jackpot” is not promoted to “16R (round) jackpot”.

Next, another variation effect shown in FIG. 35B will be briefly described.
(Special reach 2)
The variation effect of "Special Reach (losing) 2", the sub CPU120a performs the same fluctuation effect and "Special reach (jackpot) 3-2 'from the timing _{T 31} to time _{T 35} that shown in FIG. 32 (c) The “revariation effect” from timing T ₃₅ to timing T ₃₆ is not executed. Further, the sub CPU 120a does not execute the above-mentioned “big hit finalizing effect” in “special reach (losing) 2”.

Further, in the "Special Reach (losing) 2", the sub CPU120a is an operation lifetime projecting the performance button 35 (operation corresponding to the valid period Y ₃₂₎ (the second state in the jackpot Toraku decided effect described above ) Or non-protruding (the first state). However, the sub CPU 120a does not operate the first decorative member 33a regardless of whether or not the player presses the effect button 35 during the operation effective period. Accordingly, the player is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing” (the determination result that the jackpot game is not executed) (a jackpot winning determination effect).

  Further, in the “special reach (losing) 2”, the sub CPU 120a has three “special reach (second half)” as shown in the effect image (C-1) and the effect image (C-2) in FIG. 35B. Out of the production symbols, the middle symbol, which is the final stop symbol, is stopped and displayed without making it the same as the numerical value of the left symbol and the right symbol that were temporarily stopped first, so that the judgment result of the jackpot determination is “lost” To the player.

(Special reach 5)
“Special reach (big hit) 5” is “swordsman B” in which “swordsman B” appears as “special reach” as shown in stage image (c-5-1) or stage image (c-5-2) in FIG. 35B. After executing “B reach”, an effect image (C-1) for notifying “losing” as a jackpot lottery result is displayed. Subsequently, for example, an effect image (C-3) for causing a scroll to appear is displayed. After the announcement of the above-mentioned effect image (c-6), the above-mentioned effect in the re-lottery effect of whether or not the round is promoted after notifying the “big hit” as the jackpot lottery result by the revival effect This is an effect of displaying the image (c-7) and notifying that the round has been promoted.

  41A and 41B show effects in “special reach (losing) 1” and “special reach (big hit) 3-1,” and “special reach (losing) 2” and “special reach (big hit) 3-2”. It is a figure which shows control information. The effect control information shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B is a kind of information held in the variable effect pattern determination table in the sub ROM 120c. The “random number value A” to “random number value G” shown here are all random numbers for distribution ranging from 0 to 99, and are acquired by the sub CPU 120a in step S1531-2.

The production control information in FIG. 41A (a-1) is the execution ratio of the highly reliable cut-in notice in which “swordsman B” appears in “special reach (losing) 1” and “special reach (big hit) 3-1. And the execution ratio of the medium-reliability cut-in notice in which “two swords” appear and the execution ratio of the low-reliability cut-in notice in which “one sword” appears. The sub CPU 120a determines which cut-in notice is executed based on the acquired “random value A”.
In addition, the effect control information in FIG. 41A (a-1) indicates the operation ratio and the non-operation ratio of the second decorative member 33b according to the cut-in notice. The sub CPU 120a determines, based on the acquired “random number value B”, whether to operate or deactivate the second decorative member 33b according to the cut-in notice to be executed.
The numerical values shown in FIG. 41A (a-1) are the same as the numerical values shown in FIG.

In addition, the production control information in FIG. 41A (a-2) is a high-reliability cut-in notice of “swordsman A” appearing in “special reach (losing) 2” and “special reach (big hit) 3-2”. The execution ratio, the execution ratio of the medium-reliability cut-in notice in which “two shurikens” appear, and the execution ratio of the low-reliability cut-in notice in which “one shuriken” appears. The sub CPU 120a determines which cut-in notice is executed based on the acquired “random value A”.
In addition, the effect control information in FIG. 41A (a-2) indicates the operation ratio and the non-operation ratio of the second decorative member 33b according to the cut-in notice. The sub CPU 120a determines, based on the acquired “random number value B”, whether to operate or deactivate the second decorative member 33b according to the cut-in notice to be executed.

In “Special Reach (Lossing) 2”, a high-reliability cut-in notice of “Swordsman A” appears at a rate of 15% (random number A is 0 to 14), and a rate of 20% (random value) Low confidence that “Shuriken 1” appears at a ratio of 65% (Random number A is 35 to 99), with a medium-reliability cut-in notice that “2 Shuriken” appears when A is 15 to 34) Perform a cut-in notice of the degree.
On the other hand, in “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-2”, a high-reliability cut-in notice that “Swordsman A” appears at a rate of 75% (random value A is 0 to 74) is 20% A medium-reliability cut-in notice is issued at the rate (random number A is 75-94), and the rate of 5% (random number A is 95-99) is "1 shuriken" Execute the low-reliability cut-in notice that appears.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41A (a-2), the sub CPU 120a executes a highly reliable cut-in notice at a rate of 15% in the “special reach (losing) 2”. When the cut-in notice is executed, the second decorative member 33b is operated at a rate of 70%. That is, the sub CPU 120a operates the second decorative member 33b at a rate of 10.5% when executing the highly reliable cut-in notice in “special reach (losing) 2”.
On the other hand, in the case of “special reach (big hit) 3-2”, the sub CPU 120a executes the highly reliable cut-in notice at a rate of 75%, and when executing this highly reliable cut-in notice, The second decorative member 33b is operated at a rate of 90%. That is, the sub CPU 120a operates the second decorative member 33b at a rate of 67.5% when executing the highly reliable cut-in notice in the “special reach (big hit) 3-2”.
That is, “special reach (big hit) 3-2” operates the second decorative member 33b at a higher rate than “special reach (losing) 2”.
Further, as shown in FIG. 40A, in the “special reach (losing) 2”, the sub CPU 120a executes a low-reliability cut-in notice at a rate of 65%, and this low-reliability cut-in. When the advance notice is executed, the second decorative member 33b is inactive at a rate of 70%. In other words, the sub CPU 120a deactivates the second decorative member 33b at the rate of 45.5% when executing the low-reliability cut-in notice in the “special reach (losing) 2”.
On the other hand, in the case of “special reach (big hit) 3-2”, the sub CPU 120a executes the low-reliability cut-in notice at a rate of 5%, and when executing this low-reliability cut-in notice, The second decorative member 33b is inactive at a rate of 30%. In other words, the sub CPU 120a deactivates the second decorative member 33b at a rate of 1.5% when executing the low-reliability cut-in notice in “special reach (big hit) 1”.
That is, the “special reach (big hit) 3-2” makes the second decorative member 33b non-operating at a lower rate than the “special reach (losing) 2”.
As described above, since the operation ratio of the second decorative member 33b is higher in the “special reach (big hit) 3-2” than in the “special reach (losing) 2”, the sub CPU 120a sets the second decorative member 33b. By operating, the player is notified of the possibility that the determination result of the jackpot determination will be a determination result that the jackpot game is executed (a jackpot notice effect).

41A (a-1) and 41A (a-2) are compared, “super reach” is executed after “normal reach” is executed, and “special reach” is then executed. Reach production that executes “Special Reach” without executing “Super Reach” after executing “Normal Reach” is set so that the execution ratio of high-reliability cut-in notice is higher than that of Reach Production. Has been.
In other words, rather than performing a “reach” after executing “normal reach” and then performing “special reach”, “special reach” is performed without executing “super reach” after executing “normal reach”. The reach production to be executed is the reach production with a higher possibility of the jackpot game (special game) being executed (expectation degree (reliability) to the jackpot).

The effect control information of FIG. 41A (b-1) is obtained when the second decorative member 33b corresponding to the cut-in notice in “Special Reach (Lossing) 1” and “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-1” operates. The operation timing ratio is shown. The sub CPU 120a determines, based on the acquired “random number value C”, at which timing of timing E ₂₁ to timing E ₂₄ the second decorative member 33b is to be operated in accordance with the cut-in notice to be executed.
Note that the numerical values shown in FIG. 41A (b-1) are the same as the numerical values shown in FIG. 40B, and a description thereof will be omitted here.

The production control information in FIG. 41A (b-2) is obtained when the second decorative member 33b according to the cut-in notice in “Special Reach (Loss) 2” and “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-2” operates. The operation timing ratio is shown. The sub CPU 120a determines, based on the acquired “random value C”, at which timing of the timing E ₃₁ to the timing E ₃₄ the second decorative member 33b is operated in accordance with the cut-in notice to be executed.

In the case of executing a highly reliable cut-in notice in which “swordsman A” appears in “special reach (losing) 2”, when the second decorative member 33b is operated, a ratio of 18% (random value C is 0) -17) in is operated at the timing _{E 31,} operated at the timing _{E 32} rate of 12% (random number C is 18 to 29), at the timing _{E 33} ratio of 38% (random number C is 30 to 67) is operated, it is operated at the timing _{E 34} at a rate of 32% (random number C is 68 to 99).
In addition, in the case of executing a medium-reliability cut-in notice in which “two shurikens” appear in “special reach (losing) 2”, when the second decorative member 33 b is operated, a ratio of 16% (random value) C is operated at the timing _{E 31} at 0 to 15), the timing at a rate of 14% (by random number C is 16 to 29) is operated at the timing _{E 32,} the proportion of 36% (random number C is 30 to 65) is operated in E _33, it is operated at the timing _{E 34} at a rate of 34% (random number C is 66 to 99).
In addition, when executing a low-reliability cut-in notice that “one shuriken” appears in “special reach (losing) 2”, when the second decorative member 33b is operated, a ratio of 14% (random value) C is operated at the timing _{E 31} in the 0 to 13), the timing at the rate of 16% (by random number C is 14 to 29) is operated at the timing _{E 32,} the proportion of 34% (random number C is 30 to 63) is operated in E _33, it is operated at the timing _{E 34} at a rate of 36% (random number C is 64 to 99).

On the other hand, in the case of executing a highly reliable cut-in notice in which “swordsman A” appears in “special reach (big hit) 3-2”, when the second decorative member 33b is operated, a ratio of 28% (randomness) value C is operated at the timing _{E 31} at 0-27), at a rate of 42% (random number C is 28 to 69) in is operated at the timing _{E 32,} the proportion of 8% (random value C 70-77) is operated at the timing _{E 33,} it is operated at the timing _{E 34} at a rate of 22% (random number C is 78 to 99).
In addition, in the case of executing a medium-reliability cut-in notice in which “two shurikens” appear in “special reach (big hit) 3-2”, when the second decorative member 33b is operated, a ratio of 30% ( random number C is operated at the timing _{E 31} at 0-29), the proportion of 40% (random number C is 30 to 69) in is operated at the timing _{E 32,} a rate of 10% (random value C 70-79) in is operated at the timing _{E 33,} a rate of 20% (random number C is 80 to 99) operate at the timing _{E 34} at.
In addition, when executing a low-reliability cut-in notice in which “one shuriken” appears in “special reach (big hit) 3-2”, when the second decorative member 33b is operated, a ratio of 32% ( random number C allowed is operated at the timing _{E 31} 0 to 31), the proportion of 38% (random number C is 32 to 69) in is operated at the timing _{E 32,} the proportion of 12% (random number C is 70 to 81) in is operated at the timing _{E 33,} at a rate of 18% (random number C is 82 to 99) operate at the timing _{E 34.}

  Thus, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a big hit, the rate at which the second decorative member 33b operates at an earlier timing than when the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost is high. Further, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the second decorative member 33b is placed at a timing closer to or the same as the timing of switching the effect in the image display device 31 than when the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost. Since the ratio of operation is high, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation for jackpot.

  Then, as can be seen from a comparison between FIG. 41A (b-1) and FIG. 41A (b-2), “super reach” is executed after “normal reach” is executed, and then “special reach” is executed. Compared to the reach production, the image display device 31 is more effective in the case of the reach production in which the “special reach” is executed without executing the “super reach” after the execution of “normal reach”, and the lottery result of the big win is the big win. Since the rate at which the second decorative member 33b is operated at a timing close to or at the same timing as switching the performance in the game, it is possible to give the player a higher expectation for the jackpot.

The production control information of FIG. 41B (c-1) includes the execution ratio and non-execution ratio of the commentary notice according to the cut-in notice in “Special Reach (Loss) 1” and “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-1”. Show. The sub CPU 120a determines whether to execute the commentary notice or not based on the acquired “random number D” in accordance with the cut-in notice to be executed.
In addition, the numerical value shown to FIG. 41B (c-1) is the same as the numerical value shown to FIG.40 (c), and abbreviate | omits description here.

  In addition, the production control information of FIG. 41B (c-2) is the execution ratio and non-execution of the commentary notice according to the cut-in notice in “Special Reach (Lose) 2” and “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-2”. Shows the percentage. The sub CPU 120a determines whether to execute the commentary notice or not based on the acquired “random number D” in accordance with the cut-in notice to be executed.

When performing a high-reliability cut-in advance notice that “Swordsman A” appears in “Special Reach (Lose) 2”, an explanation notice is executed at a rate of 45% (random number D is 0 to 44). The commentary notice is not executed at a rate of 55% (random value D is 45 to 99).
In addition, when executing a medium-reliability cut-in notice in which “two shurikens” appear in “Special Reach (Lossing) 2”, a commentary notice is given at a rate of 55% (random number D is 0 to 54). The commentary notice is not executed at a rate of 45% (random number D is 55 to 99).
In addition, when executing a low-reliability cut-in notice that “one shuriken” appears in “Special Reach (Lose) 2”, an explanation notice is given at a ratio of 65% (random number D is 0 to 64). The commentary notice is not executed at a rate of 35% (random number D is 65 to 99).

On the other hand, when performing a highly reliable cut-in notice in which “Swordsman A” appears in “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-2”, a commentary notice is given at a rate of 25% (random number D is 0 to 24). The commentary notice is not executed at a ratio of 75% (random number D is 25 to 99).
In addition, in the case of executing a cut-in notice of medium reliability in which “two shurikens” appear in “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-2”, explanation will be given at a ratio of 35% (random number D is 0 to 34) The notice is executed and the explanation notice is not executed at a ratio of 65% (random value D is 35 to 99).
In addition, when executing a low-reliability cut-in notice that “one shuriken” appears in “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-2”, it is explained at a ratio of 45% (random number D is 0 to 44). The notice is executed and the explanation notice is not executed at a rate of 55% (random value D is 45 to 99).

  In this way, in both “Special Reach (Lose) 2” and “Special Reach (Large Bonus) 3-2”, a low-reliability cut-in advance notice is performed more than when a high-reliability cut-in notice is executed. The commentary notice is executed at a higher rate when executed.

  Also, as can be seen from a comparison between FIG. 41B (c-1) and FIG. 41B (c-2), “super reach” is executed after “normal reach” is executed, and then “special reach” is executed. Reach production (reach production C) that executes “special reach” without executing “super reach” after “normal reach” is executed, rather than reach production (reach production B). Even when the notice is executed, the execution ratio of the explanation notice is set to be higher.

The effect control information in FIG. 41B (d-1) indicates the execution ratio and non-execution ratio of the jackpot finalizing effect according to the cut-in notice in “Special Reach (Big Win) 3-1”. The sub CPU 120a determines whether to execute the jackpot finalizing effect or not based on the acquired “random value E”.
Further, the effect control information of FIG. 41B (d-1) indicates the execution timing ratio of the jackpot finalizing effect in “Special reach (big hit) 3-1”. The sub CPU 120a determines at which timing of the timings P ₂₁ and P ₂₂ before the start of the special reach and the timings P ₂₃ and P ₂₄ after the start of the special reach based on the acquired “random number value F”. decide.
Note that the numerical values shown in FIG. 41B (d-1) are the same as the numerical values shown in FIG. 40 (d), and description thereof is omitted here.

  The effect control information in FIG. 41B (d-2) indicates the execution ratio and non-execution ratio of the jackpot finalizing effect according to the cut-in notice in “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-2”. The sub CPU 120a determines whether to execute the jackpot finalizing effect or not based on the acquired “random value E”. Note that, as shown in FIG. 41B (d-2), in “special reach (losing) 2”, this jackpot finalizing effect is not executed.

When performing a high-reliability cut-in notice in which “Swordsman A” appears in “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-2”, the jackpot finalizing effect is performed at a rate of 30% (random number E is 0 to 29). The jackpot finalizing effect is not executed at a ratio of 70% (random number E is 30 to 99).
In addition, when executing a medium-reliability cut-in notice in which “two shurikens” appear in “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-2”, the jackpot is won at a rate of 15% (random number E is 0 to 14). The confirmed effect is executed, and the jackpot determined effect is not executed at a ratio of 85% (random number E is 15 to 99).
In addition, in the case of executing a low-reliability cut-in notice in which “one shuriken” appears in “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-2”, it is a big hit at a rate of 10% (random number E is 0 to 9) The confirmed effect is executed, and the jackpot determined effect is not executed at a ratio of 90% (random value E is 10 to 99).

  In this way, in “Special Reach (Large Bonus) 3-2”, the jackpot finalization effect is performed at a higher rate when the high-reliability cut-in notice is executed than when the low-reliability cut-in notice is executed. Execute.

  As can be seen from a comparison between FIG. 41B (d-1) and FIG. 41B (d-2), a reach effect is performed in which “super reach” is executed after “normal reach” is executed and “special reach” is executed thereafter. Reach production (reach production C) that executes “special reach” without executing “super reach” after execution of “normal reach” will give a cut-in advance notice of any reliability than (reach production B) Even in the case of execution, the execution ratio of the jackpot finalizing effect is set to be higher.

Further, the effect control information of FIG. 41B (d-2) indicates the execution timing of the jackpot finalizing effect corresponding to the cut-in notice in “Special Reach (Big Hit) 3-2”. In accordance with the cut-in notice to be executed, the sub CPU 120a executes the jackpot finalizing effect at any of the timings P ₃₁ and P ₃₂ before the start of the special reach, and the timings P ₃₃ and P ₃₄ after the start of the special reach. Is determined by the obtained “random number F”.

In addition, when performing a high-reliability cut-in advance notice of “Swordsman A” in “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-2”, a medium-reliability cut-in advance notice of “2 Shuriken” is executed. In the case of performing a low-reliability cut-in notice in which “one shuriken” appears, the timing before the start of special reach at a ratio of 45% (random number E is 0 to 44) run at P _31, the proportion of 35% (random number E is 45 to 79) running in a special reach before the start timing _{P 32,} Special reach after the start at a rate of 15% (random value E 80 to 94) run at timing _{P 33,} a ratio of 5% (random number E is 95 to 99) run at the timing _{P 34} after special reach start with.

  In this way, in the “special reach (big hit) 3-2” in which the second decorative member 33b always operates, the big hit finalizing effect is executed at an earlier timing, so that the player can be given a greater sense of security at an early stage. it can.

The production control information of FIG. 41B (e-1) includes the production button 35 in the jackpot winning decision production according to the cut-in notice in “special reach (losing) 1” and “special reach (bonus) 3-1”. The execution ratio of the effect controlled to the state (second state) protruding and the execution rate of the effect controlled to the state (first state) where the effect button 35 is not protruded are shown. In accordance with the cut-in notice to be executed, the sub CPU 120a controls the effect button 35 to be in a protruding state (second state) or does not protrude the effect button 35 (first state) in the jackpot winning determination effect. Is determined by the obtained “random value G”.
In addition, the numerical value shown to FIG. 41B (e-1) is the same as the numerical value shown to FIG.40 (e), and abbreviate | omits description here.

  The production control information in FIG. 41B (e-2) is the production button 35 in the jackpot winning decision production according to the cut-in notice in “special reach (losing) 2” and “special reach (big hit) 3-2”. The execution ratio of the effect controlled to the state (second state) protruding and the execution rate of the effect controlled to the state (first state) where the effect button 35 is not protruded are shown. In accordance with the cut-in notice to be executed, the sub CPU 120a controls the effect button 35 to be in a protruding state (second state) or does not protrude the effect button 35 (first state) in the jackpot winning determination effect. Is determined by the obtained “random value G”.

When performing a highly reliable cut-in notice of “Swordsman A” appearing in “Special Reach (Lossing) 2”, the ratio of 25% (random number G is 0 to 24) in the jackpot winning decision production The effect button 35 is controlled to be protruded (second state), and the effect button 35 is controlled to be not protruded (first state) at a ratio of 75% (random number G is 25 to 99).
In addition, when executing a medium-reliability cut-in notice in which “two shurikens” appear in “special reach (losing) 2”, a ratio of 20% (random value G is 0 to 0) In 19), the effect button 35 is controlled to be protruded (second state), and the effect button 35 is controlled to be not protruded (first state) at a ratio of 80% (random number G is 20 to 99). .
In addition, when executing a low-reliability cut-in notice in which “one shuriken” appears in “special reach (losing) 1”, a ratio of 15% (random value G is 0 to 0) 14), the effect button 35 is controlled to be protruded (second state), and the effect button 35 is controlled to be not protruded (first state) at a ratio of 85% (random number G is 15 to 99). .

On the other hand, in the case of executing a highly reliable cut-in notice in which “swordsman A” appears in “special reach (big hit) 3-2”, in the jackpot winning decision effect, a ratio of 95% (random value G is 0) To 94), the effect button 35 is controlled to protrude (second state), and the effect button 35 is controlled not to protrude (first state) at a rate of 5% (random value G is 95 to 99). To do.
In addition, in the case of executing a medium-reliability cut-in notice in which “two shurikens” appear in “special reach (big hit) 3-2”, in the jackpot winning decision effect, a ratio of 90% (random value G is 0 to 89), the effect button 35 is controlled to protrude (second state), and the effect button 35 is not protruded (first state) at a rate of 10% (random value G is 90 to 99). Control.
In addition, in the case of executing a low-reliability cut-in notice in which “one shuriken” appears in “special reach (big hit) 3-2”, in the jackpot winning decision effect, a ratio of 85% (random value G is 0 to 84), the effect button 35 is controlled to protrude (second state), and the effect button 35 is not protruded (first state) at a ratio of 15% (random value G is 85 to 99). Control.

  In this way, when “special reach (big hit) 2” performs a low-reliability cut-in notice, or “medium-reliability cut-in notice” than “special reach (losing) 2”, In any case where the highly reliable cut-in notice is executed, the effect button 35 is controlled to protrude (second state) in the jackpot winning decision effect at a higher rate. Therefore, the effect of controlling the effect button 35 to the protruding state (second state) informs the player that the jackpot determination result may be a determination result that the jackpot game is executed, and the jackpot determination result It is a production that gives a sense of expectation that is a big hit.

In this way, in both “Special Reach (Lost) 2” and “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-2”, a high-reliability cut-in advance notice is provided rather than a low-reliability cut-in advance notice. In the case of execution, the effect button 35 is controlled to protrude in the jackpot winning decision effect at a higher rate (second state).
41B (d-1) and FIG. 41B (d-2), a reach that executes “special reach” without executing “super reach” after executing “normal reach” is understood. The direction of the reach production in which the “super reach” is executed after the execution of “normal reach” and the “special reach” is executed after the execution of the “normal reach”, and the production button 35 is projected in the jackpot winning effect (second state) ), The execution ratio of the effect to be controlled is higher, so it can be said that this is a reach effect that has a higher possibility of executing the jackpot game (special game) (expectation degree (reliability) to the jackpot).

(First special reach (big hit) 1)
Next, a description will be given of a variation effect whose variation effect type is “first special reach (big hit) 1”. FIG. 36A is a diagram for explaining the temporal flow of the effect control of the fluctuation effect of “first special reach (big hit) 1”.
In this “first special reach (big hit) 1”, “C child reach” in which “C child” appears as a character is executed, and the second decorative member 33b, which is a movable member, is always set to non-operation. It is.

As shown in FIG. 36 (a), sub CPU120a, when to start variable display of the special symbols, in the period from the timing _{T 41} to time _{T 42} (d-1), the image display device a plurality of performance symbols 38 The “normal fluctuation” to display the fluctuation at 31 is executed. The sub CPU120a is the "normal reach" in the period from the timing _{T 42} to time _{T 43} (d-2), a "super reach" in the period from the timing _{T 43} to time _{T 44} (d-3), timing in the period from T ₄₄ to time _{T 45} (d-4), executes the character "C terminal" is appeared "C terminal reach", respectively.

In the “normal variation” in the period (d−1) from the timing T ₄₁ to the timing T ₄₂ , the sub CPU 120a displays the effect image (d−1) that displays the plurality of effect symbols 38 shown in FIG. Control to display on the image display device 31 is performed.

The sub CPU120a is the "normal reach" (the first stage reach demonstration of) in the period from the timing _{T 42} to time _{T 43} (d-2), in the image display device 31, the two symbols (left symbol of performance symbols And the right symbol) are stopped and displayed in the reach mode having the same numerical value (for example, 4), and the effect image (FIG. 37A) of the reach effect is displayed in which the remaining one of the effect symbols is variably displayed. Control for displaying the effect image (d-2)) is performed.

The sub CPU120a is subject at the timing R ₄ in the "normal reach", based on the effect control information shown in FIG. 42 described later (a), the fact that the jackpot determination result as the determination result of performing the jackpot gaming The jackpot notice effect that gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot is executed by notifying the jackpot notice effect to be performed, that is, the possibility of being a judgment result that the jackpot game is executed. Jackpot announcement attraction that is executed at this timing R _4, for example, a commentary notice such to explain the effect contents of the next "super reach" advance, possibly jackpot gaming (special game) is executed by the notice content ( Expectations for jackpot (reliability)) are set differently. Note that this commentary notice is also a “reach notice” that suggests to the player that “normal reach” will evolve to “super reach”.

In the “super reach” (second stage reach effect) in the period (d-3) from timing T ₄₃ to timing T ₄₄ , the sub CPU 120a produces an effect image in which the character “M child” appears in the image display device 31. Control for displaying the effect image (d-3 in FIG. 37) is performed. This “Super Reach” is a performance that has a higher probability of executing a jackpot game (special game) than the “Normal Reach” (expected degree of reliability (reliability)) than the “Normal Reach” character. It has become.

In the “first special reach (big hit) 1”, the sub CPU 120a notifies that the jackpot determination result is determined to be a big win based on the effect control information shown in FIG. Execute the jackpot finalizing effect. For example, the “big hit finalizing effect” is to output a predetermined sound effect from the audio output device 32 and turn on the LED or the like of the panel lighting device 34a. When the sub CPU 120a executes such a “big hit finalizing effect”, based on the effect control information shown in FIG. 42B described later, the sub CPU 120a includes the timings P _{42 to} P ₄₄ shown in FIG. Which timing is to be executed is determined.
Note that the execution timing of the “big hit finalizing effect” is not limited to the timing timings P _{41 to} P ₄₄ shown in FIG.

Sub CPU120a in a period from the timing _{T 44} to time _{T 45} (d-4), executes the "C terminal reach".
Sub CPU120a is migrated to the timing E ₄₂ of the second half of the "super reach" of the "first special Reach (jackpot) 1" by operating the third decorative member 33c, a "super reach""C terminal reach" Inform the player that he will do.
The operation contents of the third decorative member 33c at the timing _{E 42} is the same as the operation content of the third decorative member 33c at the timing _{E 17} described above.

Sub CPU120a, in variation effect of "first special Reach (jackpot) 1", and set the third decorative member 33c at the timing _{E 42} so as to always operate.
Incidentally, the sub CPU120a at timing _{E 42,} may set the third decorative member 33c to operate at a predetermined rate. For example, in the “first special reach (losing) 1” to be described later, the sub CPU 120a moves the third decorative member 33c at a ratio of 10% (the random number for distribution 0 to 9) according to the random number for distribution 0 to 99. ) And non-operation at a ratio of 90% (random number for distribution 10 to 99), and in “first special reach (big hit) 1”, the random number for distribution 0 to 99 gives the third decorative member 33c is operated at a ratio of 60% (random number for distribution 0 to 59) and inactivated at a ratio of 40% (random number for distribution 60 to 99).
As described above, the sub CPU 120a sets the operation ratio so that the first decorative reach (big hit) 1 is operated at a higher rate than the first special reach (losing) 1. By doing so, the possibility of the jackpot determination result being a determination result that the jackpot game is executed is notified by the operation of the third decorative member 33c (a jackpot notice effect).

In the “C child reach” in the period (d-4) from the timing T ₄₄ to the timing T ₄₅ , the sub CPU 120 a performs, for example, the character “C child” in the image display device 31 as shown in FIG. Is controlled so as to display the effect image (effect image (d-4) in FIG. 37). This “super reach” is due to the appearance of the character “C child”, which has a higher probability of playing a jackpot game (special game) than the character “M child” (expectation degree (reliability) for the jackpot). The production has a higher expectation of jackpot than “Super Reach”.

Sub CPU120a, during the period (d-4) in the "C terminal reach" from the timing _{T 44} to time _{T 45,} sets the operating lifetime _{Y 41} a press operation of the performance button 35 becomes effective. Sub CPU120a is, in the operation lifetime Y _41, in the image display device 31 so as to display the operation promoting notification image of performance button 35 for urging the operation of the performance button 35 to the player (not shown). Sub CPU120a, prior operating lifetime _{Y 41} is controlled to a state as not to protrude the performance button 35 (first state). The sub CPU120a, when starting the operation lifetime _{Y 41,} based on the effect control information shown in FIG. 42 (c) described below, at a predetermined ratio, the performance button 35 by the drive control of the performance button the drive motor 35b Control to the protruding state (second state).

The player, in the operation lifetime _{Y 41,} is operated pressing the performance button 35, sub CPU120a, for example controls the operations of the timing _{E 41} moves the first decorative member 33a downwardly, thereby, The player is informed that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot. Operation contents of the first decorative member 33a at the timing _{E 41} is the same as the operation content of the first decorative member 33a at the timing _{E 15.}

Incidentally, when the player is operating lifetime _{Y 41} without presses the performance button 35 during the lifetime _{Y 41} operation has elapsed even sub CPU120a the timing after the lapse of the operation lifetime _{Y 41} (also At “timing E ₄₁ ”), the first decorative member first decorative member 33 a is controlled to move downward.

In the "first special Reach (jackpot) 1", the operation lifetime _{Y 41,} although in some cases the performance button 35 and the non-protruding (first state), Again, sub CPU120a is operation performs control to operate the first decorative member 33a downward to timing E ₄₁ by lifetime Y ₄₁ player during operates presses the performance button 35, or, the player during the lifetime Y ₄₁ operation When the operation valid period Y ₄₁ elapses without pressing the effect button 35 (this is also referred to as “timing E ₄₁ ”), the first decorative member 33 a is controlled to move downward.

On the other hand, below the "first special Reach (loss) 1", sub CPU120a the operation in the effective period _{Y 12} to project the performance button 35 (the second state) or the non-projecting (first regardless of the state to) or, also, with or without pressing operation of the performance button 35 by the player during this operation lifetime Y _41, not operated first decorative member 33a.

When the effect button 35 in the protruding state (second state) is pressed down, the sub CPU 120a does not protrude from the state (second state) in which the effect button 35 protrudes (first state). Control to change to. Alternatively, the sub CPU120a is in operation lifetime _{Y 41,} even when the elapsed operating lifetime _{Y 41} by performance button 35 in a state of protruding is not pressed, the performance button 35 with the lapse of operation lifetime _{Y 41} Control is performed to change from the protruding state (second state) to the non-projecting state (first state).

  Then, in the period (d-5) during the “C child reach” shown in FIG. 36A, the sub CPU 120a displays the numerical value of the middle symbol in the image display device 31, for example, as shown in FIG. By making the numerical values of the temporarily stopped left and right symbols the same, the effect image (d-5) indicating that the three effect symbols are aligned to the same value and stopped is displayed, and the player wins a big hit game. Notify that it has been decided to execute.

(First special reach (losing) 1)
Next, a description will be given of a variation effect whose variation effect type is “first special reach (losing) 1”.
If the "first special Reach (loss) 1", sub CPU120a, as shown in FIG. 36 (a), the same fluctuation effect the "first special Reach (jackpot) 1" from the timing _{T 41} to time _{T 45} Execute. However, the sub CPU 120a does not execute the above-mentioned “big hit finalizing effect” in the “first special reach (losing) 1”. The sub CPU120a is the "first special Reach (loss) 1", the "C terminal reach", the performance button 35 on the operation enable period in demonstration decided jackpot Toraku above (operation corresponding to the valid period Y ₄₁₎ projecting (To be in the second state) or non-projecting (to be in the first state). However, the sub CPU 120a does not operate the first decorative member 33a regardless of whether or not the player presses the effect button 35 during the operation effective period. Then, in “C child reach” of “first special reach (big hit) 1”, the sub CPU 120a uses the final stop symbol of the three effect symbols shown in FIG. By displaying the effect image (D-1) in which a certain middle symbol is stopped and displayed without being the same as the numerical values of the left symbol and the right symbol that were temporarily stopped first, the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” This is notified to the player.

(First special reach (big hit) 2)
Next, a description will be given of a variation effect whose variation effect type is “first special reach (big hit) 2”. FIG. 36B is a diagram for explaining the temporal flow of the effect control of the fluctuation effect of “first special reach (big hit) 2”.
This “first special reach (big hit) 2” does not execute “super reach” after executing “normal fluctuation” and “normal reach”, but executes “C child reach” in which “C child” appears as a character. The second reach member 33b, which is a movable member, is a special reach that is set to operate at a predetermined rate.

As shown in FIG. 36 (b), sub CPU120a, when to start variable display of the special symbols, in the period from the timing _{T 51} to time _{T 52} (e-1), the image display device a plurality of performance symbols 38 The “normal fluctuation” to display the fluctuation at 31 is executed. The sub CPU120a is "normal reach" in a period from the timing _{T 52} to time _{T 53} (e-2), the period from the timing _{T 53} to time _{T 54} (e-3), in (e-4) is Then, “C child reach” in which the character “C child” appears is executed.

Sub CPU120a is the "normal variation" in the period from the timing _{T 51} to time _{T 52} (e-1), 37 an effect image that varies displaying a plurality of performance symbol 38 shown in (b) (e-1) Control to display on the image display device 31 is performed.

This “first special reach (big hit) 2” may or may not operate when the second decorative member 33b, which is a movable member, operates. The sub CPU 120a determines whether to operate or deactivate the second decorative member 33b based on the effect control information shown in FIG. When operating the second decorative member 33b, the sub CPU 120a operates at any one of timings E _{51 to} E ₅₄ before starting “C child reach” described later. The sub CPU 120a determines at which timing of the timings E _{51 to} E ₅₄ to operate the second decorative member 33b based on the effect control information shown in FIG.
The timing at which the second decorative member 33b operates is not limited to this, and any timing may be used before “C child reach”.

Timing _{E 51, E 53,} respectively, by the player during operation lifetime _{Y 52, Y 53} to the pressing operation of the performance button 35 becomes effective presses the performance button 35, or the operation lifetime _{Y 52,} This is the timing at which the second decorative member 33b operates when the operation effective periods Y ₅₂ and Y ₅₃ have elapsed even if the pressing operation on the effect button 35 is not performed during Y ₅₃ . On the other hand, timings E ₅₂ and E ₅₄ are timings at which the second decorative member 33 b operates regardless of the pressing operation of the effect button 35.
When determining the timing E _51, that is, when setting the operation effective period Y ₅₂ , or determining the timing E _53, that is, when setting the operation effective period Y ₅₃ , the sub CPU 120 a informs the player in the image display device 31. Control is performed to display an operation promotion notification image for prompting the operation of the effect button 35. In the operation effective periods Y ₅₂ and Y ₅₃ , the sub CPU 120a controls the effect button 35 so that it does not protrude (first state).

Sub CPU120a is, to set the operating lifetime _{Y 52,} the player while operating lifetime _{Y 52} operates presses the performance button 35, for example, to operate the second decorative member 33b at the timing _{E 51.} Alternatively, the sub CPU120a, when without been press operation of the operation lifetime _{Y 52} performance button 35 during the operation lifetime _{Y 52} elapses, to operate the second decorative member 33b (after the operation lifetime _{Y 52} passed operation timing also an _{E 51).}
Further, when setting the operation effective period Y ₅₃ , the sub CPU 120 a operates the second decorative member 33 b at timing E ₅₃ , for example, when the player depresses the effect button 35 during the operation effective period Y ₅₃ . Alternatively, the sub CPU120a, when without been depressed the performance button 35 during the operation lifetime _{Y 53} is operated lifetime _{Y 53} elapses, to operate the second decorative member 33b (after the operation lifetime _{Y 53} passed operation timing also an _{E 53).}

Even when the sub CPU 120a decides to deactivate the second decorative member 33b based on FIG. 42D described later, the above-described operation is performed in the operation effective period Y ₅₂ and the operation effective period Y _53. In this case, even if the player presses the effect button 35 during the operation effective period Y ₅₂ and the operation effective period Y ₅₃ , the second decorative member 33b does not operate.

Sub CPU120a, when determining the timing _{E 52} or timing _{E 54,} regardless of the pressing operation of the performance button 35 and operates the second decorative member 33b at the timing _{E 52} or timing _{E 54.}

In the “first special reach (big hit) 2”, the sub CPU 120a notifies that the jackpot determination result is determined to be a big win based on the effect control information shown in FIG. Execute the jackpot finalizing effect. For example, the “big hit finalizing effect” is to output a predetermined sound effect from the audio output device 32 and turn on the LED or the like of the panel lighting device 34a. When the sub CPU 120a executes such a “big hit finalizing effect”, based on the effect control information shown in FIG. 42 (g) described later, of the timings P _{51 to} P ₅₄ shown in FIG. Which timing is to be executed is determined.
It should be noted that the execution timing of the “big hit finalizing effect” is not limited to the timing timings P _{51 to} P ₅₄ shown in FIG.

Sub CPU120a at timing R ₅ in "normal reach" period (e-2), based on the effect control information shown in FIG. 42 (f) below, and the determination result of the jackpot determination result to execute the jackpot gaming A jackpot notice effect that gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot is executed. The timing R ₅ jackpot announcement attraction executed in, for example, a commentary notice such to explain the effect contents of the next "C child reach" advance, possibly jackpot gaming by the announcement contents (special game) is executed (Expectation for jackpot (reliability)) is set differently. This commentary notice is also a “reach notice” that suggests to the player that “normal reach” will evolve to “C child reach”.

Sub CPU120a a period from the timing _{T 53} to time _{T 54} (e-3), in (e-4), executes the "C terminal reach".
Sub CPU120a in the late timing E ₅₆ of the "normal reach" in the "first special Reach (jackpot) 2" by operating the third decorative member 33c, that the transition from "normal reach" to "C child reach" To the player.
The operation contents of the third decorative member 33c at the timing _{E 56} is the same as the operation content of the third decorative member 33c at the timing _{E 17} described above.

Sub CPU120a, in variation effect of "first special Reach (jackpot) 2" is set so as to always operate the third decorative member 33c at the timing _{E 56.}
Incidentally, the sub CPU120a at timing _{E 56,} may set the third decorative member 33c to operate at a predetermined rate. For example, in the “first special reach (losing) 2”, which will be described later, the sub CPU 120a moves the third decorative member 33c to a ratio of 35% (the random number for distribution 0 to 34) according to the random number for distribution 0 to 99. ) And non-operation at a ratio of 65% (random number for distribution 35 to 99). In “first special reach (big hit) 2”, the third decorative member is assigned with random number 0 to 99 for distribution. 33c is operated at a rate of 75% (random number for distribution 0 to 74) and inactivated at a rate of 25% (random number for distribution 75 to 99).
In this way, the sub CPU 120a sets the operation ratio so that the third decorative member 33c is operated at a higher ratio of the “first special reach (big hit) 2” than the “first special reach (losing) 2”. By doing so, the possibility of the jackpot determination result being a determination result that the jackpot game is executed is notified by the operation of the third decorative member 33c (a jackpot notice effect).

The sub CPU 120a sets an operation effective period Y _{51 in} which the pressing operation of the effect button 35 is effective during the period (e-3) in the “C child reach” from the timing T ₅₃ to the timing T ₅₄ . Sub CPU120a is, in the operation lifetime Y _51, in the image display device 31 so as to display the operation promoting notification image of performance button 35 for urging the operation of the performance button 35 to the player (not shown). Sub CPU120a, prior operating lifetime _{Y 51} is controlled to a state as not to protrude the performance button 35 (first state). The sub CPU120a, when starting the operation lifetime _{Y 51,} based on the effect control information shown in FIG. 42 (h) described later, at a predetermined ratio, the performance button 35 by the drive control of the performance button the drive motor 35b Control to the protruding state (second state).
The player, in the operation lifetime _{Y 51,} is operated pressing the performance button 35, sub CPU120a, for example controls the operations of moving the first decorative member 33a downward at the timing _{E 51,} thereby, The player is informed that the determination result of the jackpot is a jackpot (a jackpot winning effect). Operation contents of the first decorative member 33a at the timing _{E 55} is the same as the operation content of the first decorative member 33a at the timing _{E 15.}

Incidentally, when the player has elapsed operating lifetime _{Y 51} without presses the performance button 35 during the operation lifetime _{Y 51} even sub CPU120a the timing after the lapse of the operation lifetime _{Y 51} (also At “timing E ₅₅ ”), the first decorative member first decorative member 33a is moved downward to control the operation.

In the “first special reach (big hit) 2”, the effect button 35 may be non-projecting (first state) in the operation effective period Y ₅₁ , but in this case as well, the sub CPU 120 a operation and controls lifetime Y player during ₅₁ to operate the first decorative member 33a downward to timing E ₅₅ by operating pressing the performance button 35, or, the player while operating lifetime Y ₅₁ When the operation valid period Y ₅₁ elapses without pressing the effect button 35 (also referred to as “timing E ₅₅ ”), the first decorative member 33 a is controlled to move downward.

On the other hand, below the "first special Reach (losing) 2", the sub CPU120a is operated at effective period _{Y 51} to project the performance button 35 (the second state) or the non-projecting (first regardless of the state to) or, also, with or without pressing operation of the performance button 35 by the player during this operation lifetime Y _51, not operated first decorative member 33a. Accordingly, the player is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing” (the determination result that the jackpot game is not executed) (a jackpot winning determination effect).

When the effect button 35 in the protruding state (second state) is pressed down, the sub CPU 120a does not protrude from the state (second state) in which the effect button 35 protrudes (first state). Control to change to. Alternatively, the sub CPU120a is in operation lifetime _{Y 51,} even when the validity period _{Y 51} has passed operated by performance button 35 in a state of protruding is not pressed, the performance button 35 with the lapse of operation lifetime _{Y 51} Control is performed to change from the protruding state (second state) to the non-projecting state (first state).

  Then, in the period (e-4) during “C child reach” shown in FIG. 36B, the sub CPU 120a displays the numerical value of the middle symbol in the image display device 31, for example, as shown in FIG. The effect image (e-4) indicating that the three effect symbols are stopped at the same value is displayed by being the same as the numerical value of the temporarily stopped left symbol and right symbol, and the player is given a jackpot game. Notify that it has been decided to execute.

(First special reach (losing) 2)
Next, a variation effect whose variation effect type is “first special reach (losing) 2” will be described.
In the case of “first special reach (losing) 2”, a variation effect similar to “first special reach (big hit) 2” is executed from timing T ₅₁ to timing T ₅₄ shown in FIG. However, in the “first special reach (losing) 2”, the above-mentioned “big hit finalizing effect” is not executed. Then, in the “C child reach”, the sub CPU 120a, in the image display device 31, for example, the middle symbol that is the final stop symbol of the three effect symbols shown in FIG. By displaying the effect image (E-1) that is stopped and displayed without being the same as the numerical value of the symbol and the right symbol, the player is notified that the determination result of the jackpot is “losing”.

FIGS. 42A to 42C are diagrams showing effect control information in “first special reach (losing) 1” and “first special reach (big hit) 1”.
FIGS. 42D to 42H are diagrams showing effect control information in “first special reach (losing) 2” and “first special reach (big hit) 2”.
The effect control information shown in FIG. 42 is a kind of information held in the variable effect pattern determination table in the sub ROM 120c. The “random number value D” to “random number value G” shown here are all random numbers for distribution ranging from 0 to 99, and are acquired by the sub CPU 120a in step S1531-2 described above.

  The effect control information in FIG. 42A indicates the execution ratio and non-execution ratio of the commentary notice in “first special reach (losing) 1” and “first special reach (big hit) 1”. The sub CPU 120a determines whether to execute the commentary notice or not based on the acquired “random value D”.

In “First Special Reach (Lose) 1”, the explanation notice is executed at a rate of 55% (random value D is 0 to 54), and is not executed at a rate of 45% (random value D is 55 to 99). To do.
On the other hand, in “first special reach (big hit) 1”, explanation notice is executed at a rate of 35% (random value D is 0 to 34) and is not executed at a rate of 65% (random number D is 35 to 99) And

The effect control information in FIG. 42B indicates the execution ratio and non-execution ratio of the jackpot finalizing effect in “first special reach (big hit) 1”. The sub CPU 120a determines whether to execute the jackpot finalizing effect or not based on the acquired “random value E”. Note that, as shown in FIG. 42B, in the “first special reach (losing) 1”, the jackpot finalizing effect is not executed.
In “first special reach (big hit) 1”, the jackpot finalizing effect is executed at a rate of 3% (random number E is 0 to 2), and is not executed at a rate of 97% (random number E is 3 to 99). To do.

In addition, FIG. 42 (b) effect control information indicates the execution timing ratio of the jackpot finalizing effect in “first special reach (big hit) 1”. The sub CPU 120a determines whether the jackpot finalizing effect is to be executed at any of the timings P ₄₁ and P ₄₂ before the start of the C child reach, and the timings P ₄₃ and P ₄₄ after the start of the C child reach. F ".

In the "first special Reach (jackpot) 1 ', running in with C child reach before the start timing _{P 41} ratio of 12% jackpot deterministic effect (random value F is 0 to 11), 22% of the proportion (random number F is executed in the C terminal reach before the start timing _{P 42} at 12 to 33), the proportion of 28% (random value F is executed at the timing _{P 43} C-terminal reach after the start at 34-61), 38% ratio (random value F is 62 to 99) run at the timing _{P 44} C-terminal reach after the start at.

  As described above, in “first special reach (big hit) 1”, the big hit finalizing effect is set to be easily executed at a later timing after the start of the C child reach. When the second decorative member 33b is inactive, it is possible to give a big surprise to the player by executing the jackpot finalizing effect at a late timing.

  FIG. 42 (c) shows a state in which the effect button 35 in the above-mentioned jackpot winning decision effect is projected in each of “first special reach (losing) 1” and “first special reach (big hit) 1” (second The execution ratio of the effect controlled to (state) and the execution ratio of the effect controlled to the state where the effect button 35 is not projected (first state) are shown. The sub CPU 120a obtains whether to control the effect button 35 in a protruding state (second state) or not to control the effect button 35 (first state) in the jackpot winning determination effect. Random value G "

In “first special reach (losing) 1”, in the jackpot winning decision production, the production button 35 is controlled to protrude (second state) at a rate of 5% (random number G is 0 to 4), The effect button 35 is controlled so as not to protrude (first state) at a ratio of 95% (random number G is 5 to 99).
Further, in “first special reach (big hit) 1”, in the big hit winning decision production, the production button 35 is controlled to protrude (second state) at a ratio of 75% (random value G is 0 to 74). Then, the effect button 35 is controlled so as not to protrude (first state) at a ratio of 25% (random number G is 75 to 99).

  In this way, the “first special reach (big hit) 1” is higher than the “first special reach (losing) 1” in a state in which the effect button 35 protrudes in the jackpot winning decision effect at a higher rate (second Control). Therefore, the effect of controlling the effect button 35 to the protruding state (second state) informs the player that the jackpot determination result may be a determination result that the jackpot game is executed, and the jackpot determination result It is a production that gives a sense of expectation that is a big hit.

FIG. 42D shows the operation ratio and the non-operation ratio of the second decorative member 33b in “first special reach (losing) 2” and “first special reach (big hit) 2”.
In the “first special reach (losing) 2”, the second decorative member 33b is operated at a ratio of 65% (random value B is 0 to 64) and at a ratio of 35% (random number B is 65 to 99). Not working.
In "first special reach (big hit) 2", the second decorative member 33b is operated at a rate of 85% (random number B is 0 to 84) and at a rate of 15% (random number B is 85 to 99). Not working.
In this way, the sub CPU 120a operates the second decoration member 33b at a higher rate of the “first special reach (big hit) 2” than the “first special reach (losing) 2”, so that the second decoration member 33b operates. The operation of the member 33b notifies the possibility that the determination result of the jackpot determination will be a determination result that the jackpot game is executed (a jackpot notice effect).

FIG. 42E shows the operation timing ratio of the second decorative member 33b in “first special reach (losing) 2” and “first special reach (big hit) 2”. The sub CPU 120a determines at which timing of the timing E ₅₁ to the timing E ₅₄ the second decorative member 33b is operated based on the acquired “random number value C”. The timing of the second decorative member 33b is operated is not limited to this timing E ₅₁ to E _54, may be any timing as long as before "C child reach".

In the "first special Reach (losing) 2", is operated with the timing _{E 51} at a rate of 16% (random value C is 0 to 15), the timing at a rate of 14% (random number C is 16 to 29) _{E 52} And is operated at timing E ₅₃ at a rate of 36% (random value C is 30 to 65), and is operated at timing E ₅₄ at a rate of 34% (random number C is 66 to 99).

On the other hand, in the "first special Reach (jackpot) 2", the timing at a rate of 30% (random value C 0-29) in is operated to timing _{E 51,} the proportion of 40% (random number C is 30 to 69) E ₅₂ is operated at a timing of E ₅₃ at a rate of 10% (random number C is 70 to 79), and is operated at timing E ₅₄ at a rate of 20% (random number C is 80 to 99).

Thus, in the “first special reach (losing) 2”, the ratio of operating at the late timings E ₅₃ and E ₅₄ is high, and in the “first special reach (big hit) 2”, the early timings E ₅₁ and E _The rate of operation at ₅₂ is high.
Further, in the "first special Reach (losing) 2" operates at a high rate toward the timing _{E 51} than the timing _{E 52,} towards the timing _{E 53} than the timing _{E 54} is operated at a high rate.
On the other hand, in the “first special reach (big hit) 2”, the timing E ₅₂ operates at a higher rate than the timing E ₅₁ , and the timing E ₅₄ operates at a higher rate than the timing E ₅₃ .
Thus, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a big hit, the rate at which the second decorative member 33b operates at an earlier timing than when the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost is high. Further, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the second decorative member 33b is placed at a timing closer to or the same as the timing of switching the effect in the image display device 31 than when the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost. Since the ratio of operation is high, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation for jackpot.

  The effect control information in FIG. 42 (f) includes an execution ratio and a non-execution ratio of commentary notices that are a kind of jackpot notice effect in “first special reach (losing) 2” and “first special reach (big hit) 2”. Is shown. The sub CPU 120a determines whether to execute the commentary notice or not based on the acquired “random value D”.

In “first special reach (losing) 2”, the explanation notice is executed at a rate of 40% (random value D is 0 to 39), and is not executed at a rate of 60% (random value D is 40 to 99). To do.
In “first special reach (big hit) 2”, the explanation notice is executed at a rate of 20% (random value D is 0 to 19), and is not executed at a rate of 80% (random number D is 20 to 99). To do.

  The effect control information in FIG. 42 (g) indicates the execution ratio and non-execution ratio of the jackpot finalizing effect in “first special reach (big hit) 2”. The sub CPU 120a determines whether to execute the jackpot finalizing effect or not based on the acquired “random value E”. Note that, as shown in FIG. 42 (g), in the “first special reach (lost) 2”, the jackpot finalizing effect is not executed.

  In “First Special Reach (Big Bonus) 2”, the jackpot finalizing effect is executed at a rate of 25% (random number E is 0 to 24), and the jackpot is confirmed at a rate of 75% (random number E is 25 to 99). The production is not executed.

Further, the effect control information of FIG. 42 (g) indicates the execution timing ratio of the jackpot finalizing effect in “first special reach (big hit) 2”. The sub CPU 120a determines whether the jackpot finalizing effect is to be executed at any of the timings P ₅₁ and P ₅₂ before the start of the C child reach, and the timings P ₅₃ and P ₅₄ after the start of the C child reach. F ".

In the "first special Reach (jackpot) 2", the ratio of 43% jackpot deterministic effect (random value E 0-42) was run on C terminal reach before the start timing _{P 51,} the 33% ratio (random number E is running at the C terminal reach before the start timing _{P 52} 43-75), the proportion of 17% (random number E is running at C terminal reach after the start of the timing _{P 53} at 76-92), 7% ratio (random number E is 93 to 99) run in C terminal reach after the start of the timing _{P 54} at.

  As described above, in “first special reach (big hit) 2”, the big hit finalizing effect is set to be easily executed at an early timing before the start of the C child reach. When the second decorative member 33b is operated, the big hit determination effect is executed at an early timing, so that a great sense of security can be given to the player at an early stage.

  The effect control information of FIG. 42 (h) is a state in which the effect button 35 in the above-mentioned jackpot winning decision effect is projected in each of “first special reach (losing) 2” and “first special reach (big hit) 2”. The execution ratio of the effect controlled to the (second state) and the execution ratio of the effect controlled to the state where the effect button 35 does not protrude (first state) are shown. The sub CPU 120a obtains whether to control the effect button 35 in a protruding state (second state) or not to control the effect button 35 (first state) in the jackpot winning determination effect. Random value G "

In “first special reach (losing) 2”, in the jackpot winning decision production, the production button 35 is controlled to protrude (second state) at a rate of 20% (random number G is 0 to 19), The effect button 35 is controlled so as not to protrude (first state) at a rate of 80% (random number G is 20 to 99).
In the “first special reach (big hit) 2”, in the big hit winning decision production, the production button 35 is controlled to protrude (second state) at a ratio of 90% (random value G is 0 to 89). Then, the effect button 35 is controlled so as not to protrude (first state) at a rate of 10% (random number G is 90 to 99).

  As described above, the “first special reach (big hit) 2” is higher than the “first special reach (losing) 2” in a state where the effect button 35 protrudes in the big hit winning decision effect (second Control). Therefore, the effect of controlling the effect button 35 to the protruding state (second state) informs the player that the jackpot determination result may be a determination result that the jackpot game is executed, and the jackpot determination result It is a production that gives a sense of expectation that is a big hit.

(Second special reach (big hit))
Next, the variation effect whose variation effect type is “second special reach (big hit)” will be described. FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining a temporal flow of the effect control of the variation effect of “second special reach (big hit)”.
This “second special reach (big hit)” is a special reach in which “侍 D reach” in which “侍 D” appears as a character is executed, and the second decorative member 33b, which is a movable member, is always set to non-operation. is there.

As shown in FIG. 38, the sub CPU120a, when to start variable display of the special symbols, in the image display device 31 a ,, multiple performance symbols 38 in the period (f-1) from the timing _{T 61} to time _{T 62} Execute “normal fluctuation” to display fluctuation. The sub CPU120a is "normal reach" in a period from the timing _{T 62} to time _{T 63} (f-2), the period from the timing _{T 63} to time _{T 64} (f-3), in (f-4) is Then, “侍 D reach” in which the character “侍 D” appears is executed.

Sub CPU120a is the "normal variation" in the period from the timing _{T 61} to time _{T 62} (f-1), an effect image (f-1) for variably displaying a plurality of performance symbol 38 shown in FIG. 39 the image display device The control to display on 31 is performed.

Sub CPU120a is the "normal reach" period from the timing _{T 62} to time _{T 63} (f-2), in the image display device 31, the two performance symbols symbol by the same (left symbol and right symbol) Numeric (e.g. 4) Stop and display in the reach mode, and display the effect image of the reach effect (effect image (f-2) in FIG. 39) that variably displays the remaining one of the effect symbols (medium symbol).

In this “second special reach (big hit)”, the sub CPU 120a notifies that the jackpot determination result is a big hit based on the effect control information shown in FIG. "Confirmed effect" is executed. For example, the “big hit finalizing effect” is to output a predetermined sound effect from the audio output device 32 and turn on the LED or the like of the panel lighting device 34a. When the sub CPU 120a executes such a “big hit finalizing effect”, any one of the timings P _{61 to} P ₆₄ shown in FIG. 38 is based on the effect control information shown in FIG. 43B described later. Decide whether to execute at the timing.
Note that the execution timing of the “big hit finalizing effect” is not limited to the timing timings P _{61 to} P ₆₄ shown in FIG.

Sub CPU120a at timing R ₆ in the "normal reach" period (f-2), based on the execution ratio shown in FIG. 43 described later (a), jackpot determination result as the determination result of performing the jackpot gaming A jackpot notice effect that gives a sense of expectation that the determination result of the jackpot is a jackpot is executed. Is the jackpot prediction effect performed at this timing R ₆ is, for example, a commentary notice such to explain the effect contents of the next "Samurai D reach" advance, possibly jackpot gaming by the announcement contents (special game) is executed (Expectation for jackpot (reliability)) is set differently. This commentary notice is also a “reach notice” that suggests to the player that “normal reach” will evolve into “侍 D reach”.

Sub CPU120a a period from the timing _{T 63} to time _{T 64} (f-3), in (f-4), executes the "Samurai D reach".
Sub CPU120a is a timing E ₆₂ of the second half of the "normal reach" in the "second special reach (jackpot)", by operating the third decorative member 33c, and that the transition from "normal reach" to "Samurai D reach" Inform the player.
The operation contents of the third decorative member 33c at the timing _{E 62} is the same as the operation content of the third decorative member 33c at the timing _{E 17} described above.

Sub CPU120a, in variation effect of "second special reach (jackpot)" is set so as to always operate the third decorative member 33c at the timing _{E 62.}
Incidentally, the sub CPU120a at timing _{E 62,} may set the third decorative member 33c to operate at a predetermined rate. For example, in the “second special reach (losing)” to be described later, the sub CPU 120a uses the distribution random number values 0 to 99 to cause the third decorative member 33c to have a ratio of 45% (distribution random number values 0 to 44). In the second special reach (big hit), the third decorative member 33c is moved according to the random number for distribution 0-99. , 90% (random number for distribution 0 to 89) is operated, and 10% (random number for distribution 90 to 99) is not operated.
As described above, the sub CPU 120a sets the operation ratio such that the “second special reach (big hit)” is operated at a higher ratio than the “second special reach (losing)”. Therefore, the possibility of the determination result that the jackpot determination result is to execute the jackpot game is notified by the operation of the third decorative member 33c (a jackpot notice effect).

The timing E ₁₇ shown in FIG. 32A, the timing E ₂₆ shown in FIG. 32B, the timing E ₃₇ shown in FIG. _32C , the timing E ₄₂ shown in FIG. The timing E _{56 of} b) and the timing E _{62 of} FIG. 38 are timings at which the third decorative member 33c operates regardless of the pressing operation of the effect button 35.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. Timing E ₁₇ in FIG. 32A, timing E ₂₆ in FIG. 32B, timing E ₃₇ in FIG. 32C, timing E ₄₂ in FIG. 36A, FIG. The operation effective period of the effect button 35 is associated with at least one of the timing E ₅₆ of (b) and the timing E ₆₂ of FIG. 38, and the player presses the effect button 35 during the operation effective period. Alternatively, the third decorative member 33c may be operated when the operation effective period elapses without the pressing operation of the effect button 35 during the operation effective period.

Sub CPU120a, during the period (f-3) in the "Samurai D reach" from the timing _{T 63} to time _{T 64,} sets the operating lifetime _{Y 61} a press operation of the performance button 35 becomes effective. Sub CPU120a is, in the operation lifetime Y _61, in the image display device 31 so as to display the operation promoting notification image of performance button 35 for urging the operation of the performance button 35 to the player (not shown). Sub CPU120a, prior operating lifetime _{Y 61} is controlled to a state as not to protrude the performance button 35 (first state). The sub CPU120a, when starting the operation lifetime _{Y 61,} based on the effect control information shown in FIG. 43 (c) described below, at a predetermined ratio, the performance button 35 by the drive control of the performance button the drive motor 35b Control to the protruding state (second state).
The player, in the operation lifetime _{Y 61,} is operated pressing the performance button 35, sub CPU120a, for example controls the operations of the timing _{E 61} moves the first decorative member 33a downwardly, thereby, The player is informed that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot (a jackpot winning effect). Operation contents of the first decorative member 33a at the timing _{E 61} is the same as the operation content of the first decorative member 33a at the timing _{E 15.}

Incidentally, when the operation lifetime _{Y 61} without presses the performance button 35 player while operating lifetime _{Y 61} has passed even sub CPU120a the timing after the lapse of the operation lifetime _{Y 61} (also At “timing E ₆₁ ”), the first decorative member first decorative member 33 a is controlled to move downward.

In the “second special reach (big hit)”, the effect button 35 may be non-projecting (first state) during the operation effective period Y _{61. In} this case as well, the sub CPU 120 a similarly operates. performs control to operate the first decorative member 33a downward to timing E ₆₁ by the player during the lifetime Y ₆₁ depresses the performance button 35, or, effect player while operating lifetime Y ₆₁ When the operation valid period Y ₆₁ elapses without pressing the button 35 (also referred to as “timing E ₆₁ ”), the first decorative member 33a is controlled to move downward.

On the other hand, below the "first special Reach (loss) 1", sub CPU120a is operated at effective period _{Y 61} to project the performance button 35 (the second state) or the non-projecting (first regardless of the state to) or, also, with or without pressing operation of the performance button 35 by the player during this operation lifetime Y _61, not operated first decorative member 33a. Accordingly, the player is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing” (the determination result that the jackpot game is not executed) (a jackpot winning determination effect).

When the effect button 35 in the protruding state (second state) is pressed down, the sub CPU 120a does not protrude from the state (second state) in which the effect button 35 protrudes (first state). Control to change to. Alternatively, even when the operation effective period Y ₆₁ has elapsed since the projecting effect button 35 in a protruding state is not pressed during the operation effective period Y ₆₁ , the sub CPU 120a activates the effect button 35 as the operation effective period Y ₆₁ elapses. Control is performed to change from the protruding state (second state) to the non-projecting state (first state).

  In the period (f-3) during “侍 D reach” after “normal reach”, for example, as shown in FIG. 39, the sub CPU 120a displays an effect image (f) in which the character “侍 D” appears in the image display device 31. -3) is displayed on the image display device 31.

  Then, in the period (f-4) in “侍 D reach” shown in FIG. 38, the sub CPU 120a, for example, as shown in FIG. By being the same as the numerical value of the right symbol, the effect image (f-4) indicating that the three effect symbols are aligned and stopped at the same numerical value is displayed, and the player is determined to execute the jackpot game. Inform.

(2nd special reach (losing))
Next, the variation effect whose variation effect type is “second special reach (losing)” will be described.
If the "second special reach (loss)", sub CPU120a performs the fluctuation effect from the timing _{T 61} to time _{T 64} similar to the "second special reach (jackpot)" shown in FIG. 38. However, the sub CPU 120a does not execute the above-mentioned “big hit finalizing effect” in the “second special reach (losing)”. The sub CPU120a is, in the "second special reach (loss)", in "Samurai D reach", to protrude the performance button 35 on the operation lifetime of the jackpot Toraku decided effect described above (operation corresponding to the valid period Y ₆₁₎ (Second state) or non-protruding (first state).
However, the sub CPU 120a does not operate the first decorative member 33a regardless of whether or not the player presses the effect button 35 during the operation effective period. Accordingly, the player is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing” (the determination result that the jackpot game is not executed) (a jackpot winning determination effect).

  In the “second D reach” of the “second special reach (losing)”, the sub CPU 120a causes the image display device 31 to display the middle symbol which is the final stop symbol of the three effect symbols shown in FIG. 39, for example. By displaying the effect image (F-1) that is stopped and displayed without being the same as the numerical values of the left symbol and the right symbol that have been temporarily stopped, the player can determine that the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” To inform.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing effect control information in “second special reach (losing)” and “second special reach (big hit)”. The effect control information shown in FIG. 43 is a kind of information held in the variable effect pattern determination table in the sub ROM 120c. The “random number value D” to “random number value G” shown here are all random numbers for distribution ranging from 0 to 99, and are acquired by the sub CPU 120a in step S1531-2 described above.

  The production control information in FIG. 43A indicates the execution ratio and non-execution ratio of the commentary notice as the jackpot notice effect in the “second special reach (losing)” and the “second special reach (big hit)”. . The sub CPU 120a determines whether to execute the commentary notice or not based on the acquired “random value D”.

In the “second special reach (losing)”, the explanation notice is executed at a rate of 70% (random value D is 0 to 69), and is not executed at a rate of 30% (random value D is 70 to 99). .
On the other hand, in the “second special reach (big hit)”, the explanation notice is executed at a rate of 50% (random value D is 0 to 49) and is not executed at a rate of 50% (random number D is 50 to 99). To do.

The effect control information in FIG. 43 (b) indicates the execution ratio and non-execution ratio of the jackpot finalizing effect in the “second special reach (big hit)”. The sub CPU 120a determines whether to execute the jackpot finalizing effect or not based on the acquired “random value E”. Note that, as shown in FIG. 43B, in the “second special reach (losing)”, the jackpot finalizing effect is not executed.
In the “second special reach (big hit)”, the jackpot finalizing effect is executed at a rate of 15% (random number E is 0 to 14) and is not executed at a rate of 85% (random number E is 15 to 99). .

Further, the effect control information in FIG. 43B indicates the execution timing ratio of the jackpot finalizing effect in the “second special reach (big hit)”. Sub CPU120a is Samurai D reach before the start timing _{P 61, P 62,} at any timing of the timing _{P 63, P 64} Samurai D reach after starting whether to perform a jackpot definite effect was acquired "random number F ".

In “second special reach (big hit)”, the big hit finalizing effect is executed at a rate of 3% (random value F is 0 to 2) at the timing P ₆₁ before the start of 侍 D reach, and a rate of 17% (random value F) There was run on Samurai D reach before the start timing _{P 62} 4-20), the proportion of 33% (random value F is performed in samurai D reach after the start of the timing _{P 63} at 21-53), the proportion of 47% (random number F is 54 to 99) run at the timing _{P 64} Samurai D reach after the start at.

  Thus, in the “second special reach (big hit)”, the big hit finalizing effect is set to be easily executed at a late timing after the start of the 侍 D reach. When the second decorative member 33b is inactive, it is possible to give a big surprise to the player by executing the jackpot finalizing effect at a late timing.

  The production control information of FIG. 43 (c) is a state in which the production buttons 35 in the above-mentioned jackpot winning decision production are projected in the “second special reach (losing)” and “second special reach (big hit)” (first The execution ratio of the effect controlled to (state 2) and the execution rate of the effect controlled to the state where the effect button 35 does not protrude (first state) are shown. The sub CPU 120a obtains whether to control the effect button 35 in a protruding state (second state) or not to control the effect button 35 (first state) in the jackpot winning determination effect. Random value G "

In the “second special reach (losing)”, in the jackpot winning decision effect, the effect button 35 is controlled to protrude (second state) at a rate of 20% (random number G is 0 to 19). The effect button 35 is controlled so as not to protrude (first state) at a ratio of% (random number G is 20 to 99).
In the “second special reach (big hit) 1”, in the big hit winning decision production, the production button 35 is controlled to protrude (second state) at a ratio of 90% (random value G is 0 to 89). Then, the effect button 35 is controlled so as not to protrude (first state) at a rate of 10% (random number G is 90 to 99).

  In this way, the “second special reach (big hit) 2” has a higher ratio of the effect button 35 protruding in the jackpot winning decision effect than the “second special reach (losing)” (second state) ) To control. Therefore, the effect of controlling the effect button 35 to the protruding state (second state) informs the player that the jackpot determination result may be a determination result that the jackpot game is executed, and the jackpot determination result It is a production that gives a sense of expectation that is a big hit.

  As described above, when the effect control board 120 receives various commands from the main control board 110, a command reception interrupt process of the effect control board 120 occurs, and the received command is stored in the reception buffer.

  Then, the sub CPU 120a in the effect control board 120 analyzes the received command and generates commands (data) for executing various effects in the timer interrupt process of the effect control board 120 performed every 2 ms. Thereafter, the sub CPU 120a transmits the generated various commands (data) to the image control unit 150, the drive control unit 160, the lamp control unit 170, and the frame control board 180.

  The image control unit 150 receives a command (data) from the effect control board 120 and controls display of images in the first image display device 31 and the second image display device 37 based on the received command (data). Will do.

Similarly, the drive control unit 160 controls the drive of the board drive device 33 by receiving a command (data) from the effect control board 120, and the lamp control unit 170 controls the command (data) from the effect control board 120. Is received, lighting control of the panel illumination device 34a is performed.
The frame control board 180 receives the command (data) from the effect control board 120, thereby controlling the sound output of the sound output device 32 and controlling the lighting of the frame lighting device 34b to drive the effect button. The drive control of the motor 35b is performed.

  Hereinafter, a specific example of the effect of operating the movable member (the first decorative member 33a, the second decorative member 33b, or the third decorative member 33c) will be described.

First, a specific example of effects by the effect button 35, the second decorative member 33b, and the image display device 31 in “normal fluctuation” of “special reach (big hit) 1” will be described with reference to FIG.
Sub CPU120a, in "Special Reach (jackpot) 1", as shown in the starting the operation lifetime _{Y 14} in "normal variation" as shown in FIG. 32 (a), for example, FIG. 47 (a), the image display In the device 31, as an operation promotion notification image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 35 together with an image for variably displaying a plurality of effect symbols, for example, a character display “Press the button!” And the effect button 35 are displayed. And an image of the timer gauge of the operation valid period are displayed. Sub CPU120a, in this operation lifetime _{Y 14,} is controlled to a state as not to protrude the performance button 35 (first state).

Figure 47 (a) shows a state where the performance button 35 is not yet depressed in the operation lifetime Y _14. Sub CPU120a is among the performance button 35 in the operation lifetime _{Y 14} not depressed, so that not operated second decorative member 33b.

Thereafter, when the performance button 35 as shown in the operation lifetime _{Y 14} in the example FIG. 47 (b) is depressed, the sub CPU120a, due panel drive unit 33 drives the second decorative member 33b, With the lower part of the second decorative member 33b as a fulcrum, the image display device 31 is tilted to the left from the “first standby position” (original position), which is the right position of the image display device 31, and the “first position” is the front position of the image display device 31. The operation position is moved to (the position after movement). At this time, the sub CPU 120a causes the image display device 31 to display an effect image that emphasizes the second decorative member 33b.

  Thereafter, the sub CPU 120a drives the second decorative member 33b by the panel drive device 33 to stand on the right side with the lower side of the second decorative member 33b as a fulcrum, and returns to the original position “first standby position”. Operate to return. When the sub CPU 120a operates the second decoration member 33b to return to the “first standby position” that is the original position, for example, as shown in FIG. An image in which the effect design is variably displayed is displayed.

It should be noted that the operation effective period Y ₂₃ during “normal fluctuation” in FIG. 32B (special reach (big hit) 3-1) and “normal fluctuation” in FIG. 32C (special reach (big hit) 3-2). The operation effective period Y _{34 in} the middle and the operation effective period Y ₅₂ in the “normal fluctuation” of (first special reach (big hit) 2) in FIG. 36B are similar to the effects shown in FIG. Executed.
Further, the operation effective period Y ₁₅ during “normal reach” in FIG. 32A (special reach (big hit) 1), and the operation valid in “normal reach” in FIG. 32B (special reach (big hit) 3-1). Period Y ₂₄ , operation effective period Y ₃₅ in “normal reach” in FIG. 32 (c) (special reach (big hit) 3-2), “normal reach” in (first special reach (big hit) 2) in FIG. 36 (b) In the operation effective period Y ₅₃ in FIG. 47, the same effects as those described with reference to FIG. 47 are executed except that the display contents of the image display device 31 in FIGS. 47A and 47C are different. .

Next, a specific example of effects by the effect button 35, the third decorative member 33c, and the image display device 31 in “Super reach” of “Special reach (big hit) 1” will be described with reference to FIG.
In the “super reach” of “special reach (big hit) 1”, the sub CPU 120a displays an effect image in which the character “M child” appears on the image display device 31, for example, as shown in FIG.
The sub CPU120a at timing _{E 17} of the second half of the "super reach", for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), the panel drive unit 33, a third decorative member 33c by driving the third decorative member 33c Is tilted to the right from the “third standby position” (original position), which is the lower left position of the image display device 31, and the “third operation position”, which is the position of the front surface of the image display device 31. Operate to move to (position after movement). At this time, the sub CPU 120a causes the image display device 31 to display an effect image in which light is emitted from, for example, the third decorative member 33c.

  Thereafter, the sub CPU 120a causes the panel drive device 33 to drive the third decorative member 33c so that the lower side of the third decorative member 33c stands on the left side as a fulcrum, and returns to the original position. For example, as shown in FIG. 48 (c), the sub CPU 120a operates the third decorative member 33c so as to return it to the original position, and then causes the image display device 31 to display “special reach” “swordsman X” and “swordsman A”. An effect image in which "" appears is displayed. In this way, by operating the third decorative member 33c at the timing immediately before the start of “Special Reach” in “Super Reach”, the player is informed of the transition from “Super Reach” to “Special Reach”. Yes.

Incidentally, FIG. 32 (b) when operating the third decorative member 33c at the timing _{E 26} in "super reach" of (Special Reach (jackpot) 3-1), FIG. 32 (c) (Special Reach (jackpot) 3 If the timing _{E 37} in "super reach" -2) operating a third decorative member 33c, the timing _{E 42} in "super reach" of FIG. 36 (a a) (first special reach (jackpot) 1) in the case of operating the third decorative member 33c, when operating the third decorative member 33c at the timing _{E 56} in "normal reach" of FIG. 36 (b) (first special reach (jackpot) 2), in FIG. 38 even in the case of operating the third decorative member 33c at the timing E ₆₂ in "normal reach" (second special reach (jackpot)), the image display apparatus of FIG. 48 (c) Except that the display content of 1 is different, the 48 effect the same effect as described with reference to is executed.

Next, a specific example of effects by the effect button 35, the first decorative member 33a, and the image display device 31 in “special reach (second half)” of “special reach (big hit) 1” will be described with reference to FIG.
Sub CPU120a, when starting the operation lifetime _{Y 12} in "Special Reach (second half)" of "Special Reach (jackpot) 1", for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (a), in the image display device 31, a character As an operation promotion notification image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 35 together with an effect image in which the “swordsman A” and the character “swordsman B” fight the enemy character “swordsman X”, for example, “Press and hold!” The character display, the image of the effect button 35 and the image of the timer gauge during the operation valid period are displayed. Sub CPU120a is before the start of the operation lifetime _{Y 12} is controlled to a state as not to protrude the performance button 35 (first state). Sub CPU120a, when to start the operation lifetime _{Y 12,} FIG. 40 at a predetermined rate based on the effect control information shown in (e), does not protrude the performance button 35 state 49 (first state) (a ) To the protruding state (second state) as shown in FIG.

Figure 49 (a) shows a state where the performance button 35 is not yet depressed in the operation lifetime Y _12. Sub CPU120a is among the performance button 35 in the operation lifetime _{Y 12} not depressed, so that not operated first decorative member 33a.

Thereafter, when the performance button 35 as shown in the operation lifetime _{Y 12} in the example FIG. 49 (b) is depressed, the sub CPU120a, due panel drive unit 33, the drives the first decorative member 33a The first decorative member 33 a is moved from the “second standby position” (original position), which is the position above the image display device 31, to the “second operation position” (after movement), which is the position on the front surface of the image display device 31. The movement control is performed such that the image is moved downward, and the image display device 31 is arranged on the front surface. At this time, the sub CPU 120a causes the image display device 31 to display an effect image that emphasizes the first decorative member 33a. The sub CPU 120a notifies that the jackpot determination result is the determination result that the jackpot game is executed by operating the first decorative member 33a in this manner.

  A panel lighting device 34a having three star lamps (LEDs, etc.) is provided behind the first decorative member 33a arranged at the position shown in FIG. 49 (a). As shown in FIG. 49B, when the first decorative member 33a moves downward, the front surfaces of the three star lamps are exposed. The sub CPU 120a controls the panel illumination device 34a to light two star lamps out of the three star lamps, for example, as shown in FIG. 49B, thereby operating the first decorative member 33a. In the same manner as described above, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot is the determination result that the jackpot game is executed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 49C, for example, the sub CPU 120a drives the first decorative member 33a by the panel drive device 33 and moves it upward to move it to the “second standby position” (original position). Return to. When the sub CPU 120a operates the first decoration member 33a to return to the “second standby position” (original position) as shown in FIG. 49C, for example, the image display device 31 has a plurality of effect symbols. An effect image that is stopped and displayed in a display mode in which 38 is the same numerical effect design (for example, 444) is displayed to notify that it is determined that the jackpot game will be executed.

It should be noted that the operation valid period Y ₂₂ in “special reach (second half)” in FIG. 32B (special reach (big hit) 3-1) and “c” in FIG. 32C (special reach (big hit) 3-2). Operation effective period Y _{32 in} “special reach (second half)”, operation effective period Y ₄₁ in “C child reach” in (first special reach (big hit) 1) of FIG. 36A, FIG. Also in the operation effective period Y ₅₁ during “C child reach” of (first special reach (big hit) 2), the display contents of the image display device 31 of FIG. The production is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, an effect button 35 in “re-lottery effect” of “special reach (big hit) 1” when “first big hit” or “third big hit” of 16R (round) is determined, Specific examples of effects by the first decorative member 33a and the image display device 31 will be described.
Sub CPU120a starts the operation lifetime Y ₁₃ in "redrawing effect" in the "Special Reach (jackpot) 1" when 16R "first jackpot" of (round) or "third jackpot" is determined And, for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), the image display device 31 displays an effect image in which the effect symbols of three identical numerical values (for example, 444) previously stopped and displayed are displayed in full rotation, as the operation promotion notification image for prompting the operation of the performance button 35 to the player, for example, to display and character display of the "press!", the image of the timer gauge of the image and operation effective period Y ₁₅ of the performance button 35. Sub CPU120a is before the start of the operation lifetime _{Y 13} is controlled to a state as not to protrude the performance button 35 (first state). Sub CPU120a, when to start the operation lifetime _{Y 13,} at a rate of above (80%), is protruded from the state of not protruding the performance button 35 (first state) as shown in FIG. 50 (a) Control to the state (second state).

Figure 50 (a) shows a state where the performance button 35 is not yet depressed in the operation lifetime Y _13. Sub CPU120a is among the performance button 35 in the operation lifetime _{Y 13} not depressed, so that not operated first decorative member 33a.

Thereafter, when the performance button 35 as shown in the operation lifetime _{Y 13} in the example FIG. 50 (b) is depressed, the sub CPU120a, due panel drive unit 33, the drives the first decorative member 33a The first decorative member 33 a is moved from the “second standby position” (original position), which is the position above the image display device 31, to the “second operation position” (after movement), which is the position on the front surface of the image display device 31. The movement control is performed such that the image is moved downward, and the image display device 31 is arranged on the front surface. At this time, the sub CPU 120a causes the image display device 31 to display an effect image that emphasizes the first decorative member 33a. By operating the first decorative member 33a in this manner, the sub CPU 120a notifies that the “16R (round) jackpot” that is more advantageous to the player than the “4R (round) jackpot” is executed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 50B, the sub CPU 120a controls the panel lighting device 34a to turn on all the three star lamps exposed by moving the first decorative member 33a downward. In the same manner as the operation of the first decorative member 33a, it is notified that “16R (round) jackpot” that is more advantageous to the player than “4R (round) jackpot” is executed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 50C, for example, the sub CPU 120a drives the first decorative member 33a by the panel drive device 33 and moves it upward to move to the “second standby position” (original position). Return to. For example, as shown in FIG. 50C, the sub CPU 120a operates the first decorative member 33a to return to the “second standby position” (original position), and then performs a plurality of effects on the image display device 31. Notifying that “16R (round) jackpot” is executed by stopping and displaying in the display mode of another same numerical value (for example, 777) different from the same numerical value (444) that stopped and displayed the symbol 38 first. To do.

It should be noted that the operation valid period during the “re-lottery effect” in FIG. 32B (special reach (bonus) 3-1) when the “first jackpot” or “third jackpot” of 16R (round) is determined. Operation valid during “re-lottery effect” in FIG. 32C (special reach (bonus) 3-2) when “first jackpot” or “third jackpot” of Y ₁₃ , 16R (round) is determined also in the period Y _33, directing the same effect as shown in FIG. 50 is executed.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second decoration member 33b (first movable member) is moved from the first standby position to the first operation position in the jackpot notice effect of the variation effect. Is notified of the possibility that the determination result of the jackpot determination will be a determination result that the jackpot game is executed. In addition, in the jackpot winning effect (result notification effect) of the variation effect, the determination result of the jackpot determination by moving the first decorative member 33a (second movable member) from the second standby position to the second operation position. Is notified that the determination result is that the jackpot game will be executed.
As described above, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a plurality of movable members such as the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b. Can be realized.

  Moreover, after notifying that it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed by stopping and displaying a plurality of effect symbols in a specific display mode in the variation effect, the first decorative member 33a (second movable member) is By moving from the standby position of 2 to the second operating position, as a special game, “16R (round) is advantageous as a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than“ 4R (round) jackpot ”as the first special game. ) "Big jackpot" is executed.

  Furthermore, when the second effect (for example, special reach) is executed after the first effect (for example, super reach) is executed in the variable effect, the third decorative member 33c (the second decoration) is executed before the execution of the second effect. 3 movable member) is moved from the third standby position to the third operating position.

  Thus, even if the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment uses a plurality of movable members such as the first decorative member 33a, the second decorative member 33b, and the third decorative member 33c, the roles of the operations of the movable members are different. Therefore, it becomes possible to realize a more understandable presentation.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment controls the effect button 35 that is the operation means to the non-projecting state (first state) when executing the notice effect in the variable effect,
Since the effect button 35 is controlled to the non-protruding state (first state) or the protruding state (second state) when the big hit determination winning decision effect (result notification effect) is executed, it is a big hit in the variable effect. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the jackpot in the effect of informing whether the game is lost or lost.

In the above-described embodiment, the execution ratio of the “commentary notice” is the same as that in the case where the highly reliable cut-in notice is executed, that is, the second decorative member, regardless of whether the determination result of the big hit is lost or jackpot. An example in which the jackpot notice effect is executed at a higher rate when the low-reliability cut-in notice is executed, that is, when the second decorative member 33b is inactivated at a higher ratio than when the 33b is operated at a higher ratio. Explained.
However, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is not limited to this, and the execution rate of the “commentary notice” is not activated when the low-reliability cut-in notice is executed, that is, the second decorative member 33b is operated at a high rate. In the case where the highly reliable cut-in notice is executed, that is, the case where the second decorative member 33b is operated at a high rate, the “explanatory notice” may be executed at a higher rate than the case where

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, than when performing a low-reliability cut-in notice, that is, when the second decorative member 33b is deactivated at a high rate, The example in which the jackpot finalizing effect is executed at a higher rate when the highly reliable cut-in notice is executed, that is, when the second decorative member 33b is operated at a higher rate has been described.
However, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is not limited to this, and the execution ratio of the “big hit finalizing effect” is set to operate when the highly reliable cut-in notice is executed, that is, the second decoration member 33b is operated at a high ratio. It is also possible to execute the jackpot finalizing effect at a higher rate when the low-reliability cut-in notice is executed, that is, when the second decorative member 33b is deactivated at a higher rate than when the cut-in notification is performed.

For example, in the case of “Special Reach (Lose) 1”, in the example of FIG. 40C described above, when a highly reliable cut-in notice of “Swordsman B” appears, a ratio of 40% (random value) If D is 0-39), and a low-reliability cut-in warning for “one sword” appears, it will be explained at a rate of 60% (random value D is 0-59). The notice was executed. Instead, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), when performing a highly reliable cut-in notice in which “Swordsman B” appears, the rate is 60% (random value D is 0 to 59). When the commentary notice is executed and the low-reliability cut-in notice for “one sword” appears, the commentary notice is set to be executed at a rate of 40% (random number D is 0 to 39). May be.
Similarly, in the case of “special reach (big hit) 1”, in the example of FIG. 40C described above, when a highly reliable cut-in notice of “swordsman B” is executed, a ratio of 20% (disturbance) When the commentary notice is executed when the numerical value D is 0 to 19) and the low-reliability cut-in notice that “one sword” appears is executed at a rate of 40% (random value D is 0 to 39) Commentary notice was executed. Instead, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), for example, when executing a highly reliable cut-in notice in which “Swordsman B” appears, the ratio is 40% (random value D is 0 to 39). When the commentary notice is executed and the low-reliability cut-in notice that “one sword” appears, the commentary notice is set to be executed at a rate of 20% (random number D is 0 to 19). May be.

  In addition, in the case of “special reach (big hit) 1”, in the example of FIG. 40D described above, when a highly reliable cut-in notice in which “swordsman B” appears, a ratio of 25% (random value) When D is 30 to 54), the jackpot finalizing effect is executed, and when the low-reliability cut-in notice of “one sword” is executed, the ratio is 5% (random value D is 70 to 74). The jackpot finalizing effect was executed. Instead, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), when a highly reliable cut-in notice of “Swordsman B” is executed, the rate is 5% (random number D is 70 to 74). When the jackpot finalizing effect is executed and the low-reliability cut-in notice of “one sword” is executed, the jackpot finalizing effect is executed at a rate of 25% (random value D is 30 to 54). May be set.

  Similarly, in “Special Reach (Lost) 2”, “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-1,” and “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-2” Instead of the execution ratio and the execution ratio of the “big hit finalizing effect” shown in FIG. 41B (c-1), (c-2), (d-1), (d-2), for example, FIG. You may set like 1), (a-2), (b-1), (b-2).

  Further, in the above-described example, “super reach” is executed after “normal reach” is executed, and “super reach” is executed after “normal reach” is executed, rather than the reach effect (reach effect B) where “special reach” is executed after that. Reach production (reach production C) that performs “special reach” without executing a game has a higher probability of executing a jackpot game (special game) (expectation to the jackpot (reliability)) I explained it as a production.

  However, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is not limited to this, but rather than the reach effect (reach effect C) in which “special reach” is executed without executing “super reach” after executing “normal reach”. Reach production (reach production B) that executes “super reach” after executing “normal reach” and then executes “special reach” is likely to carry out jackpot game (special game) It may be a reach production with a higher degree of expectation (reliability).

For example, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 41A (a-1) and 41A (a-2), “special reach (losing) 2” is more preferable than “special reach (losing) 1”. The execution ratio of the high-reliability cut-in notice is set to be higher, and the execution ratio of the low-reliability cut-in notice is set to be lower, and the “special reach (big hit) 3-1” is set to “special reach (big hit) 3-1. “3-2” is set such that the execution ratio of the high-reliability cut-in notification is higher and the execution ratio of the low-reliability cut-in notification is lower.
Instead, for example, as shown in FIGS. 46A (a-1) and 46A (a-2), “Special Reach (Lose) 2” is more reliable than “Special Reach (Lose) 1”. The cut-in notice execution rate is set to be lower and the low-reliability cut-in notice execution ratio is set to be higher, so that “special reach (big hit) 3-1” is higher than “special reach (big hit) 3-1”. “2” may be set such that the execution rate of the high-reliability cut-in notification is lower and the execution rate of the low-reliability cut-in notification is higher.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 41A (b-1) and 41A (b-2), “special reach (losing) 2” is more preferable than “special reach (losing) 1”. Further, the “special reach (big hit) 3-2” is closer to the timing for switching the effect on the image display device 31 than the “special reach (big hit) 3-1” or the same timing as the second decorative member 33 b. The rate of operation is set high.
Instead, for example, as shown in FIG. 46A (b-1) and FIG. 46A (b-2), “special reach (losing) 2” is more preferable than “special reach (losing) 1”. The “special reach (big hit) 3-2” causes the second decorative member 33 b to operate at a timing closer to or the same as the timing for switching effects in the image display device 31 than “special reach (big hit) 3-1”. You may set so that a ratio may become low.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41B (c-1) and FIG. 41B (c-2), “special reach (losing) 2” is more preferable than “special reach (losing) 1”. In addition, “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-2” is higher than “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-1” in the case of executing the cut-in notice of any reliability. It is set to be.
Instead, for example, as shown in FIG. 46B (c-1) and FIG. 46B (c-2), “special reach (losing) 2” is more preferable than “special reach (losing) 1”. When “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-2” executes a cut-in notice of any reliability, the execution ratio of the commentary notice is lower than “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-1”. May be set.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41B (d-1) and FIG. 41B (d-2), “special reach (big hit) 3-2” rather than “special reach (big hit) 3-1”. In this case, the execution ratio of the jackpot finalizing effect is set to be higher in any case of executing the cut-in notice of any reliability.
Instead, for example, as shown in FIG. 46B (d-1) and FIG. 46B (d-2), “special reach (big hit) 3-2” rather than “special reach (big hit) 3-1” However, when executing the cut-in notice of any reliability, the execution ratio of the jackpot finalizing effect may be set to be low.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41B (e-1) and FIG. 41B (e-2), “special reach (losing) 2” is more preferable than “special reach (losing) 1”. In addition, “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-2” is more effective than the “Special Reach (Big Bonus) 3-1”, regardless of the reliability of the cut-in image displayed. The effect which controls to the state (2nd state) which protruded the button 35 is performed in a higher ratio.
Instead, for example, as shown in FIG. 46B (e-1) and FIG. 46B (e-2), “special reach (losing) 2” is more preferable than “special reach (losing) 1”. In the case where the cut-in image of any reliability is displayed for “special reach (big hit) 3-2” rather than “special reach (big hit) 3-1”, the effect button 35 in the jackpot winning decision effect is displayed. You may set so that the production | generation which controls to the state (2nd state) which protruded may be performed in a lower ratio.

In the above-described embodiment, the “first state” of the effect button 35 is “protruded state (protruded state)”, and the “second state” of the effect button 35 is “non-protruded state (non-projected state)”. " However, the “first state” and “second state” of the effect button 35 are not limited to this.
For example, when the effect button 35 performs a vibration operation, the “first state” is set as the “non-vibration state” of the effect button 35, and the “second state” is set as the “vibration state” of the effect button 35. It is good.
For example, when an LED is mounted on the effect button 35 and is to be lit, the “first state” is set to “the state that the effect button 35 is lit in blue”, and the “second state” is set to the effect button. 35 may be “a state of being lit red”.

In the above-described embodiment, the operation unit that can change the state between the “first state” and the “second state” has been described as the effect button 35, but is not limited thereto, and is another operation unit. For example, an operation lever may be used.
When the operation means that can change the state between the first state and the second state is an operation lever, for example, the “first state” is a state in which the operation lever is arranged on the back side, The “state” may be a state in which the operation lever is disposed in front.

In the above-described embodiment, the “first standby position”, the “second standby position”, and the “third standby position” are different positions, but the “first standby position” and the “first standby position” are different. Any two or all of “second standby position” and “third standby position” may be the same position.
Similarly, in the above-described embodiment, the “first operation position”, the “second operation position”, and the “third operation position” are different positions, but the “first operation position” and “ Any two or all of the “second operation position” and the “third operation position” may be the same position.

  In addition, the presentation control information included in the sub-ROM 120b of the above-described embodiment includes the second decoration according to the cut-in notice (high-reliability cut-in notice, medium-reliability cut-in notice, and low-reliability cut-in notice). The operation ratio and non-operation ratio of the member 33b are set. However, instead of this, as the production control information of the sub ROM 120b, the high-reliability cut-in notice, the medium-reliability cut-in notice, and the low-reliability cut according to the operation and non-operation of the second decorative member 33b. You may make it set the execution ratio of each in advance notice.

  The gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a so-called “ST (Special Time) machine” in which a high probability state is set until a predetermined number of fluctuations has elapsed after the end of the jackpot game. . Note that the gaming machine 1 is not limited to an ST machine, and may be a gaming machine in which a high probability state continues (or 10000 times high probability gaming state continues) until the next jackpot is won.

In the above-described embodiment, the “first special game” is, for example, “4R (round) jackpot”, and the “second special game” is, for example, “16R (round) jackpot”.
However, the “first special game” and the “second special game” are not limited to this, and the “second special game” is more advantageous to the player than the “first special game”. Good. For example, the “first special game” may be a jackpot set in a non-short-time game state after a jackpot game, and the “second special game” may be a jackpot set in a time-saving game state after a jackpot game.
Further, the “first special game” may be “ordinary jackpot”, and the “second special game” may be “probability jackpot”.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, although the game machine used for a pachinko game machine was demonstrated, you may use for a swing type game machine (slot machine), a sparrow ball game machine, and an arrange ball game machine.

[Configuration different from the present invention]
<Configuration 1>
The gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment displays determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the start condition, and a game effect image associated with the game. A display means, a movable member operable in accordance with the game, display control for notifying a result of determination by a variation effect by a plurality of effect symbols on the display means, and an effect control means for controlling the operation of the movable member in the variation effect; After the first stage reach effect (normal reach) is executed by temporarily stopping some effect symbols of the plurality of effect symbols in the reach mode. Reach production (reach production A) for executing the second stage reach production (super reach), which is more likely to be executed than the first stage reach production (normal reach). After the first stage reach production (normal reach) is executed, the second stage reach production (super reach) is executed, and after the second stage reach production (super reach) is executed, the second stage reach production (super reach) is executed. After performing the reach production (reach production B) that performs the third stage reach production (special reach) and the first stage reach production (normal reach), which are more likely to be executed than the reach) There is a third reach effect (reach effect C) in which the third stage reach effect (special reach) is executed without executing the second stage reach effect (super reach). When the reach effect A is executed, the movable member is not operated before the second stage reach effect (super reach) is executed, and when the reach effect C is executed, before the third stage reach effect (special reach) is executed. There are cases where the movable member is operated and non-operating, and when the reach effect B is executed, the movable member is operated before the second stage reach effect (super reach) is executed, There is a case to do.
Thereby, the gaming machine 1 can realize a more interesting effect using the movable effect device.

<Configuration 2>
Further, in this gaming machine 1, the third stage reach effect (special reach) executed in the reach effect A and the third stage reach effect (special reach) executed in the reach effect B have the effect modes. Different.

<Configuration 3-1>
Further, in this gaming machine 1, the reach effect B executed by the effect control means is a reach effect with a higher expectation that the special game is executed than the reach effect C.
<Configuration 3-2>
Alternatively, in this gaming machine 1, the reach effect C executed by the effect control means is a reach effect that has a higher expectation that the special game is executed than the reach effect B.

<Configuration 4>
Further, in this gaming machine 1, the effect control means executes the third stage reach effect in the reach effect C using a specific motif aspect, and also in the third stage reach effect in the reach effect B, this motif aspect. It may be executed using

<Configuration 5>
Further, in this gaming machine 1, the reach effect B is composed of a plurality of types with different expectations for the execution of the special game due to different effect modes of the third stage reach effect (special reach).

<Configuration 6>
Further, the gaming machine 1 is configured to determine whether to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the start condition, display means to display a game effect image associated with the game, A movable member operable in accordance with the game, a display control for notifying a result of the determination by a variation effect by a plurality of effect symbols in the display means, and an effect control means for controlling the operation of the movable member in the variation effect. The variable effects that can be executed by the control means include a jackpot finalizing effect for notifying that the special game is executed in response to the determination that the special game is executed as a result of the determination, and the possibility that the special game is executed. The jackpot announcement effect is displayed, and when the jackpot finalizing effect is executed, the movable member is moved compared to the case where the jackpot finalizing effect is executed without operating the movable member. If the jackpot finalizing effect is executed at a higher rate after the jackpot finalizing effect is executed and the jackpot warning effect is executed, the jackpot warning effect is executed without operating the movable member, and the movable member The selection ratio of the jackpot notice effect is made different between the case where the jackpot notice effect is executed after the operation is performed.
Accordingly, it is possible to provide a gaming machine configured to realize a more interesting effect in the variable effect for performing the jackpot notice effect and the jackpot finalizing effect.

<Configuration 7>
Also, in this gaming machine 1, when the jackpot notice effect is executed, the effect control means performs the jackpot notice effect after operating the movable member, rather than executing the jackpot notice effect without operating the movable member. In the case of execution, it is easier to execute a jackpot notice effect that is more likely to be executed in a special game.

<Configuration 8>
Further, in this gaming machine 1, the effect control means operates the movable member when the determination result is determined to execute the special game, compared to the case where the jackpot notice effect is performed after the movable member is operated. In the case where the jackpot notice effect is executed without making it, it is easier to execute the notice effect at a higher rate.

<Configuration 9>
Further, the gaming machine 1 is configured to determine whether to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the start condition, display means to display a game effect image associated with the game, A movable member operable in accordance with the game, a display control for notifying a result of the determination by a variation effect by a plurality of effect symbols in the display means, and an effect control means for controlling the operation of the movable member in the variation effect. The variable effects that can be executed by the control means include a jackpot finalizing effect for notifying that the special game is executed in response to the determination that the special game is executed as a result of the determination, and the possibility that the special game is executed. The jackpot announcement effect is included, and when the jackpot finalizing effect is executed, the movable member is compared with the case where the jackpot finalizing effect is executed after the movable member is operated. When the jackpot finalizing effect is executed without making it, the jackpot finalizing effect is executed at a higher rate, and when the jackpot warning effect is executed, the case where the jackpot warning effect is executed without moving the movable member is movable. The selection ratio of the jackpot notice effect is changed depending on whether the jackpot notice effect is executed after the member is operated.
Accordingly, it is possible to provide a gaming machine configured to realize a more interesting effect in the variable effect for performing the jackpot notice effect and the jackpot finalizing effect.

<Configuration 10>
Further, in this gaming machine 1, the effect control means executes the jackpot notice effect after operating the movable member, rather than executing the jackpot notice effect without operating the movable member, when executing the jackpot notice effect. In this case, it is easier to execute a jackpot notice effect that is more likely to be executed in a special game.

<Configuration 11>
Further, in this gaming machine 1, the effect control means operates the movable member when the determination result is determined to execute the special game, compared to the case where the jackpot notice effect is executed without operating the movable member. In the case where the jackpot notice effect is executed after being made, it is easier to execute the notice effect at a higher rate.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Game machine 2 Game board 14 1st starting port 14a 1st starting port detection switch 15 2nd starting port 15a 2nd starting port detection switch 20 1st special symbol display device 21 2nd special symbol display device 31 Image display device (display) means)
33a First decorative member (second movable member)
33b Second decorative member (first movable member)
33c 3rd decoration member (3rd movable member)
35 Production buttons (operation means)
35a Production button detection switch 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
110b Main ROM
110c Main RAM
120 Production control board 120a Sub CPU
120b Sub ROM
120c sub RAM
180 Frame control board

Claims (3)

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on establishment of the start condition;
Display means for displaying a game effect image associated with the game;
At least a first movable member and a second movable member operable with the game;
The display means includes display control for notifying the result of the determination by fluctuating effects by a plurality of effect symbols, and effect control means for controlling the operation of the first movable member and the second movable member,
The production control means includes
In the variation production,
Informing the possibility that the determination result by the determination means is the determination result that the special game is executed by moving the first movable member from the first standby position to the first operation position;
The fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result that the special game is executed by moving the second movable member from the second standby position to the second operation position is notified. Gaming machine. The production control means includes
In the variation effect, the fact that the special game is decided to be executed is notified by stopping and displaying the plurality of effect symbols in a specific display mode, and after the notification, the second movable member is moved to the second state. The fact that the second special game, which is more advantageous to the player than the first special game, is executed as the special game by being moved from the standby position to the second operation position. The gaming machine according to claim 1. A third movable member operable by the game by the operation control of the effect control means;
The production control means includes
In the case where the second effect is executed after the first effect is executed in the variable effect, the third movable member is moved from the third standby position to the third operation position before the second effect is executed. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is moved to a position.